Passport 8 and 12 Operators Manual

Passport 8 and 12 Operators Manual
Passport 12/Passport 8
Patient Monitor
Operator’s Manual
© Copyright 2014 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Release time:
2014-12

Revision:
1.0
WARNING

Federal Law (USA) restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property
rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents
and does not convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the information in
this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaption and translation of this manual in any manner
whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
,
, and
are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China
and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes without the
intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their respective owners.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
I
Manufacturer’s Responsibility
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray is not liable for errors contained herein nor for
incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by Mindray
authorized personnel;

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local requirements;

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
WARNING

Only skilled/trained clinical professionals should operate this equipment.

It is important for the hospital or organization that uses this equipment to perform a recommended
service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
Warranty
Mindray warrants that components within its products will be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a
period of one year from the date of purchase except that disposable or one-time use products are warranted to be free
from defects in workmanship and materials up to a date one year from the date of purchase or the date of first use,
whichever is sooner.
This warranty does not cover consumable items such as, but not limited to, batteries, external cables, and sensors.
Mindray shall not be liable for any incidental, special, or consequential loss, damage, or expense directly or indirectly
arising from the use of its products. Liability under this warranty and the buyer’s exclusive remedy under this warranty is
limited to servicing or replacing the affected products, at Mindray option, at the factory or at an authorized distributor,
for any product which shall under normal use and service appear to Mindray to have been defective in material or
workmanship. Recommended preventative maintenance, as prescribed in the service manual, is the responsibility of the
user and is not covered by this warranty.
No agent, employee, or representative of Mindray has any authority to bind Mindray to any affirmation, representation,
or warranty concerning its products, and any affirmation, representation or warranty made by any agent, employee, or
representative shall not be enforceable by buyer or user.
THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF, AND MINDRAY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS, ANY OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND OF ANY OTHER OBLIGATION ON THE PART OF MINDRAY.
II
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Damage to any product or parts through misuse, neglect, accident, or by affixing any non-standard accessory
attachments, or by any customer modification voids this warranty. Mindray makes no warranty whatsoever in regard to
trade accessories, such being subject to the warranty of their respective manufacturers.
A condition of this warranty is that the equipment or accessories which are claimed to be defective be returned when
authorized, freight prepaid to Mindray DS USA, Inc., Mahwah, New Jersey 07430 or its authorized representative.
Mindray shall not have any responsibility in the event of loss or damage in transit.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability for
direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the
use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty does not extent to

Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure events, such as (i) flood, fire and earthquake or other similar
elements of nature or acts of God; (ii) riots, war, civil disorders, rebellions, or revolutions in any country; or (iii) any
other cause beyond the reasonable control of Mindray.

Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or unauthorized service people.

Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible.

Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Service
Mindray maintains a network of service representatives and factory-trained distributors. Prior to requesting service,
perform a complete operational check of the instrument to verify proper control settings. If operational problems
continue to exist,
In North America contact the Service Department at (800) 288-2121, ext: 8116 for Technical Support or (201) 995-8000
for assistance in determining the nearest field service location.
Please include the instrument model number, the serial number, and a description of the problem with all requests for
service.
Any questions regarding the warranty should be directed to your local sales or service representative.
NOTE

Upon request, Mindray provides circuit diagrams, component part lists, descriptions, calibration
instructions, or other information which assist the user’s appropriately qualified technical personnel to
repair those parts of the equipment which are designated by Mindray DS USA, Inc. as repairable.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
III
Company Contact
Manufacturer:
Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address:
Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech industrial park, Nanshan,
Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
IV
Website:
www.mindray.com
E-mail Address:
[email protected]
Tel:
+86 755 81888998
Fax:
+86 755 26582680
Distributor:
Mindray DS USA, Inc.
Address:
800 MacArthur Boulevard, Mahwah, New Jersey, 07430 USA
Tel:
1.800.288.2121, 1.201.995.8000
Website:
www.mindray.com
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Preface
Manual Purpose
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and
intended use. Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper product performance and correct operation and
ensures patient and operator safety.
This manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore some contents may not apply to your product. If you
have any questions, please contact Mindray.
This manual is an integral part of the product. It should always be kept close to the equipment so that it can be
conveniently referenced when needed.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for clinical professionals who are expected to have a working knowledge of medical procedures,
practices and terminology as required for monitoring of patients.
Illustrations
All illustrations in this manual serve as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect the setup or data displayed on
your monitor.
Manual Conventions

Italic text is used to quote the referenced chapters or sections.

[ ] is used to enclose screen text.

→ is used to indicate operational procedures.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
V
FOR YOUR NOTES
VI
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Contents
1 Safety ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Safety Information .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Warnings .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Cautions ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Notes ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Equipment Symbols....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
2 The Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Intended Use .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Applied Parts .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.1 Front View ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3.2 Side View .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.3 Rear View.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.4 Modules.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.5 Display Screen .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.6 QuickKeys ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2-11
3 Basic Operations................................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Installation ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Environmental Requirements ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Getting Started ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 Connecting to Power Source ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.2 Turning Power On ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.3 Starting Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Turning Off the Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Using the Knob ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.5 Using Keys ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.6 Using the Touchscreen.................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.7 Using the On-screen Keyboard .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.8 Using the Main Menu .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.9 Setting the Screen .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.10 Displaying the Timer ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.11 Changing General Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.11.1 Setting up a Monitor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.11.2 Changing Language ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.11.3 Adjusting the Screen Brightness ............................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.11.4 Showing/Hiding Help Text .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.11.5 Setting the Date and Time........................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.11.6 Adjusting Volume ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.12 Setting Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.12.1 Switching the Parameters On/Off ............................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1
3.12.2 Accessing the Parameters Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.13 Operating Modes ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.13.1 Monitoring Mode .........................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.13.2 Night Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.13.3 Privacy Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.13.4 Demo Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.13.5 Standby Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-11
4 Managing Patients ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Admitting a Patient ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Quick Admitting a Patient ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Querying and Obtaining Patient Information ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Associating Patient Information ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.5 Editing Patient Information ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.6 Discharging a Patient .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.7 Transferring Patient Data ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.7.1 Transferring Data from the Monitor to a USB Drive ............................................................................................................. 4-3
4.7.2 Transferring Data from a USB Drive to the Monitor ............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.8 Connecting to a CMS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
5 Managing Configurations ................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Entering the [Manage Configuration] Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3 Changing Department ................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.4 Setting Default Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.5 Saving Current Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.6 Editing Configurations.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.7 Deleting a Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.8 Transferring a Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.9 Loading a Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.10 Restoring the Latest Configuration Automatically .......................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.11 Modifying Password .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
6 User Screens ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Configuring Your Screens ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Changing the Waveform Line Size ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Changing Measurement Colors .................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.3 Changing Screen Layout ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Viewing Minitrends ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Having a Split-Screen View of Minitrends ............................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Setting Minitrends ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Viewing OxyCRG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.4 Viewing Other Patients ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.4.1 Care Group .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Viewing the Care Group Overview Bar ..................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.3 Understanding the View Other Patient Window................................................................................................................... 6-5
2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6.5 Understanding the Big Numerics Screen ............................................................................................................................................... 6-6
7 Alarms ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Alarm Categories ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Alarm Levels ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Alarm Indicators .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3.1 Alarm Lamp ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.2 Alarm Messages ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3.3 Flashing Numeric .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3.4 Audible Alarm Tones ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.3.5 Alarm Status Symbols ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4 Alarm Tone Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.4.1 Setting the Minimum Alarm Volume ......................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.4.2 Changing the Alarm Volume......................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.4.3 Setting the Interval Between Alarm Sounds ........................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.4.4 Changing the Alarm Tone Pattern............................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.5 Setting the Reminder Tones.......................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.5 Understanding the Alarm Setup Menu................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.5.1 Setting Alarm Properties for All Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.5.2 Adjusting Alarm Limits Automatically ....................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5.3 Setting Alarm Delay Time............................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.4 Setting SpO2 Technical Alarm Delay .........................................................................................................................................7-10
7.5.5 Setting Recording Length............................................................................................................................................................7-10
7.5.6 Entering CPB Mode (Cardiopulmonary Bypass Mode) .....................................................................................................7-10
7.6 Pausing Alarms...............................................................................................................................................................................................7-10
7.7 Switching Off All Alarms .............................................................................................................................................................................7-11
7.8 Resetting Alarms ...........................................................................................................................................................................................7-11
7.9 Latching Alarms .............................................................................................................................................................................................7-12
7.10 Testing Alarms..............................................................................................................................................................................................7-12
7.11 Using Care Group Alarms .........................................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.11.1 Care Group Auto Alarms .............................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.11.2 Setting Care Group Alert Tone .................................................................................................................................................7-13
7.11.3 Resetting Care Group Alarms ...................................................................................................................................................7-13
8 Monitoring ECG ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Safety ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.3 Preparing to Monitor ECG ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the Electrodes ................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.3.2 Choosing AHA or IEC Lead Placement ....................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.3 ECG Lead Placements ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.4 Checking Paced Status.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.4 Understanding the ECG Display ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.5 Changing ECG Settings................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.5.1 Accessing ECG Menus...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.5.2 Setting Pacemaker Rate (For Mortara ECG algorithm only) .............................................................................................. 8-5
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3
8.5.3 Choosing the Alarm Source .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.5.4 Changing ECG Wave Settings....................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.5.5 Changing the ECG Filter Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.5.6 Setting Pacemaker Rate (For Mortara only) ............................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.5.7 Setting the ECG Lead Set ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.5.8 Choosing an ECG Display Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.5.9 Setting the Notch Filter .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
8.5.10 Changing the Pacer Reject Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.5.11 Enabling Smart Lead Off .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
8.5.12 Setting the Alarm Level for ECG Lead Off Alarms ............................................................................................................... 8-7
8.5.13 Adjusting QRS Volume ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
8.5.14 About the Defibrillator Synchronization ............................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.6 About ST Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.6.1 Switching ST On and Off ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.6.2 Changing ST Filter Settings ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6.3 Understanding the ST Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6.4 Saving the Current ST Segment as Reference ...................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.6.5 Changing the Reference Segment ...........................................................................................................................................8-10
8.6.6 Deleting a Reference Segment ..................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.6.7 Recording the ST Segment .........................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.6.8 Changing the ST Alarm Limits ....................................................................................................................................................8-10
8.6.9 Setting the ST Alarm Delay Time ............................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.6.10 Adjusting ST Measurement Points ......................................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.7 About Arrhythmia Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................8-12
8.7.1 Understanding the Arrhythmia Events ................................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.7.2 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings .....................................................................................................................................8-14
8.7.3 Changing Arrhythmia Threshold Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.7.4 Setting the Extended Arrhythmia (For Mindray ECG Algorithm only, currently unavailable in the US and
Canada) .........................................................................................................................................................................................................8-15
8.7.5 Reviewing Arrhythmia Events ....................................................................................................................................................8-15
8.8 ECG Relearning ..............................................................................................................................................................................................8-16
8.8.1 Initiating an ECG Relearning Manually ................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.8.2 Automatic ECG Relearning ..........................................................................................................................................................8-16
8.9 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................................................................8-16
9 Monitoring Respiration (Resp) ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Safety Information ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Understanding the Resp Display .............................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.4 Placing Resp Electrodes ............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4.1 Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp ........................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.4.2 Cardiac Overlay ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.4.3 Abdominal Breathing ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4.4 Lateral Chest Expansion ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.5 Choosing the Respiration Lead ................................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.6 Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-3
4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
9.7 Changing Resp Detection Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.8 Changing Resp Wave Settings ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.9 Setting Respiration Rate Source ................................................................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.10 Setting Alarm Properties............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-4
10 Monitoring PR ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.2 Setting the PR Source ...............................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.3 Selecting the Active Alarm Source .......................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.4 QRS Tone........................................................................................................................................................................................................10-2
11 Monitoring SpO2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Safety...............................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.3 Identifying SpO2 Modules........................................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.4 Applying the Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.5 Changing SpO2 Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.5.1 Accessing SpO2 Menus ................................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.5.2 Adjusting the Desat Alarm .........................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.5.3 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity ..............................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.5.4 Changing Averaging Time .........................................................................................................................................................11-3
11.5.5 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously ........................................................................................................................ 11-3
11.5.6 Sat-Seconds Alarm Management ...........................................................................................................................................11-4
11.5.7 Changing the Speed of the Pleth Wave ................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11.5.8 Zooming PI Value ..........................................................................................................................................................................11-5
11.5.9 Setting the Alarm Level for SpO2 Sensor Off Alarm .......................................................................................................... 11-5
11.5.10 Setting the SpO2 Tone Mode ..................................................................................................................................................11-5
11.6 Measurement Limitations........................................................................................................................................................................11-6
11.7 Masimo Information ..................................................................................................................................................................................11-6
11.8 Nellcor Information ....................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
11.9 Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................................................................................11-7
12 Monitoring NIBP ............................................................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.2 Safety ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.3 Measurement Limitations .......................................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.4 Measurement Methods ............................................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.5 Setting Up the NIBP Measurement ......................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.1 Preparing the Patient ..................................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.2 Preparing to Measure NIBP .......................................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.3 Starting and Stopping Measurements .................................................................................................................................12-4
12.5.4 Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level ...........................................................................................12-4
12.5.5 Enabling NIBP Auto Cycling and Setting the Interval......................................................................................................12-4
12.5.6 Starting a STAT Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................12-4
12.6 Understanding the NIBP Numerics ......................................................................................................................................................12-5
12.7 Changing NIBP Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................12-5
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5
12.7.1 Setting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure ............................................................................................................................. 12-5
12.7.2 Setting NIBP Alarm Properties .................................................................................................................................................12-5
12.7.3 Displaying NIBP List.....................................................................................................................................................................12-6
12.7.4 Setting the Pressure Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................12-6
12.7.5 Switching On NIBP End Tone ...................................................................................................................................................12-6
12.8 Assisting Venous Puncture......................................................................................................................................................................12-6
13 Monitoring Temp ........................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.2 Safety ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.3 Making a Temp Measurement ...............................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.4 Understanding the Temp Display ........................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.5 Setting the Temperature Unit ................................................................................................................................................................13-2
14 Monitoring IBP .............................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.2 Safety ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.3 Zeroing the Transducer ............................................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.4 Setting Up the Pressure Measurement ..............................................................................................................................................14-2
14.5 Understanding the IBP Display .............................................................................................................................................................14-3
14.6 Changing IBP Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................14-4
14.6.1 Changing a Pressure for Monitoring .....................................................................................................................................14-4
14.6.2 Setting Alarm Properties ...........................................................................................................................................................14-4
14.6.3 Changing Averaging Time ........................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.6.4 Setting Up the IBP Wave ............................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.6.5 Setting the Pressure Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................14-5
14.6.6 Enabling PPV Measurement and Setting PPV Source..................................................................................................... 14-5
14.7 Overlapping IBP Waveforms ..................................................................................................................................................................14-6
14.8 Measuring PAWP ........................................................................................................................................................................................14-7
14.8.1 Preparing to Measure PAWP..................................................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.8.2 Setting Up the PAWP Measurement ......................................................................................................................................14-8
14.8.3 Understanding the PAWP Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................ 14-8
14.9 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................................................................................14-9
15 Monitoring Cardiac Output .......................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.2 Understanding the C.O. Display ...........................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.3 Influencing Factors ....................................................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.4 Setting Up the C.O. Measurement .......................................................................................................................................................15-3
15.5 Measuring the Blood Temperature ......................................................................................................................................................15-6
15.6 Changing C.O. Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................15-6
15.6.1 Setting the Temperature Unit ..................................................................................................................................................15-6
15.6.2 Setting Alarm Properties ...........................................................................................................................................................15-6
16 Monitoring CO2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................16-1
6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16.2 CO2 Module...................................................................................................................................................................................................16-2
16.3 Preparing to Measure CO2 .......................................................................................................................................................................16-2
16.3.1 Making a Sidestream CO2 Measurement .............................................................................................................................16-3
16.3.2 Making a Microstream CO2 Measurement ..........................................................................................................................16-4
16.4 Changing CO2 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................................16-4
16.4.1 Accessing CO2 Menus ..................................................................................................................................................................16-4
16.4.2 Entering the Standby Mode .....................................................................................................................................................16-4
16.4.3 Setting the CO2 Unit ....................................................................................................................................................................16-5
16.4.4 Setting up Gas Compensations ...............................................................................................................................................16-5
16.4.5 Setting up Humidity Compensation .....................................................................................................................................16-5
16.4.6 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay ...............................................................................................................................................16-6
16.4.7 Choosing a Time Interval for Peak-Picking ..........................................................................................................................16-6
16.4.8 Setting the Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................................16-6
16.4.9 Setting up the CO2 Wave............................................................................................................................................................16-7
16.5 Setting RR Source .......................................................................................................................................................................................16-7
16.6 Barometric Pressure Compensation ....................................................................................................................................................16-7
16.7 Measurement Limitations .......................................................................................................................................................................16-8
16.8 Leakage test .................................................................................................................................................................................................16-8
16.9 Troubleshooting the Sidestream CO2 Sampling System ..............................................................................................................16-8
16.10 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System ....................................................................................................................................16-9
16.11 Zeroing the Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................................16-9
16.12 Calibrating the Sensor......................................................................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.13 Oridion Information ............................................................................................................................................................................. 16-10
17 Monitoring AG ............................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.2 Understanding the AG Display ..............................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.3 MAC Values ...................................................................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.4 Preparing to Measure AG .........................................................................................................................................................................17-4
17.5 Changing AG Settings...............................................................................................................................................................................17-5
17.5.1 Setting Gas Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................17-5
17.5.2 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay ...............................................................................................................................................17-5
17.5.3 Changing the Sample Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................................17-5
17.5.4 Setting up the O2 Compensation ...........................................................................................................................................17-5
17.5.5 Entering the Standby Mode .....................................................................................................................................................17-6
17.5.6 Setting up the AG Wave .............................................................................................................................................................17-6
17.5.7 Setting RR Source .........................................................................................................................................................................17-6
17.6 Changing the Anesthetic Agent ............................................................................................................................................................17-6
17.7 Measurement Limitations .......................................................................................................................................................................17-7
17.8 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................................................................................17-7
17.8.1 When the Gas Inlet is Blocked..................................................................................................................................................17-7
17.8.2 When an Internal Occlusion Occurs.......................................................................................................................................17-7
17.8.3 When an Internal Occlusion Occurs.......................................................................................................................................17-7
17.9 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System ......................................................................................................................................17-8
18 Freezing Waveforms...................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7
18.1 Freezing Waveforms ..................................................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.2 Viewing Frozen Waveforms ....................................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.3 Unfreezing Waveforms .............................................................................................................................................................................18-2
18.4 Recording Frozen Waveforms ................................................................................................................................................................18-2
19 Review ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19-1
19.1 Accessing Respective Review Windows .............................................................................................................................................19-1
19.2 Reviewing Graphic Trends ......................................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.3 Reviewing Tabular Trends .......................................................................................................................................................................19-2
19.4 Reviewing Events .......................................................................................................................................................................................19-3
19.4.1 Marking Events .............................................................................................................................................................................19-3
19.4.2 Reviewing Events .........................................................................................................................................................................19-4
19.5 Reviewing Waveforms ..............................................................................................................................................................................19-6
20 Calculations ................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................................................20-1
20.2 Dose Calculations ......................................................................................................................................................................................20-2
20.2.1 Performing Calculations ............................................................................................................................................................20-2
20.2.2 Selecting the Proper Drug Unit...............................................................................................................................................20-2
20.2.3 Titration Table ................................................................................................................................................................................20-3
20.2.4 Drug Calculation Formulas .......................................................................................................................................................20-3
20.3 Oxygenation Calculations .......................................................................................................................................................................20-3
20.3.1 Performing Calculations ............................................................................................................................................................20-3
20.3.2 Entered Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................20-4
20.3.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas ................................................................................................................................... 20-4
20.4 Ventilation Calculations ...........................................................................................................................................................................20-5
20.4.1 Performing Calculations ............................................................................................................................................................20-5
20.4.2 Entered Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................20-5
20.4.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas ................................................................................................................................... 20-6
20.5 Hemodynamic Calculations ...................................................................................................................................................................20-6
20.5.1 Performing Calculations ............................................................................................................................................................20-6
20.5.2 Entered Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................20-7
20.5.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas ................................................................................................................................... 20-7
20.6 Renal Calculations......................................................................................................................................................................................20-8
20.6.1 Performing Calculations ............................................................................................................................................................20-8
20.6.2 Entered Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................20-8
20.6.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas ................................................................................................................................... 20-9
20.7 Understanding the Review Window ...................................................................................................................................................20-9
21 Recording ....................................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
21.1 Using a Recorder ........................................................................................................................................................................................21-1
21.2 Overview of Recording Types ................................................................................................................................................................21-1
21.3 Starting and Stopping Recordings ......................................................................................................................................................21-2
21.4 Setting up the Recorder ..........................................................................................................................................................................21-2
21.4.1 Accessing the Record Setup Menu ........................................................................................................................................21-2
21.4.2 Selecting Waveforms for Recording ......................................................................................................................................21-2
8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
21.4.3 Setting the Realtime Recording Length...............................................................................................................................21-3
21.4.4 Setting the Interval between Timed Recordings ..............................................................................................................21-3
21.4.5 Changing the Recording Speed ..............................................................................................................................................21-3
21.4.6 Clearing Recording Tasks ...........................................................................................................................................................21-3
21.5 Loading Paper..............................................................................................................................................................................................21-3
21.6 Removing Paper Jam ................................................................................................................................................................................21-4
21.7 Cleaning the Recorder Printhead .........................................................................................................................................................21-4
22 Printing .......................................................................................................................................................................... 22-1
22.1 Printer .............................................................................................................................................................................................................22-1
22.2 Connecting a printer .................................................................................................................................................................................22-1
22.3 Setting Up the Printer ...............................................................................................................................................................................22-2
22.4 Starting Report Printouts ........................................................................................................................................................................22-2
22.5 Stopping Report Printouts ......................................................................................................................................................................22-3
22.6 Setting Up Reports ....................................................................................................................................................................................22-3
22.6.1 Setting Up ECG Reports .............................................................................................................................................................22-3
22.6.2 Setting Up Tabular Trends Reports ........................................................................................................................................22-3
22.6.3 Setting Up Graphic Trends Reports .......................................................................................................................................22-4
22.6.4 Setting Up Realtime Reports ....................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.7 End Case Reports ........................................................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.8 Printer Statuses ...........................................................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.8.1 Printer Out of Paper .....................................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.8.2 Printer Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................................22-4
23 Other Functions............................................................................................................................................................. 23-1
23.1 Analog Output .............................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.2 Exporting the Log ......................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.3 Transferring Data ........................................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.3.1 Data Export System .....................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.3.2 Transferring Data by Different Means ...................................................................................................................................23-2
23.4 Nurse Call ......................................................................................................................................................................................................23-2
23.5 Network Connection .................................................................................................................................................................................23-3
23.5.1 Setting the Network Type..........................................................................................................................................................23-3
23.5.2 Setting up the Wireless Network ............................................................................................................................................23-4
23.6 Setting the CMS ..........................................................................................................................................................................................23-4
23.6.1 Selecting a CMS ............................................................................................................................................................................23-5
23.6.2 Clearing the Selected CMS at Startup...................................................................................................................................23-5
23.7 Setting the Multicast Parameters .........................................................................................................................................................23-5
24 Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................24-1
24.2 Charging a Battery .....................................................................................................................................................................................24-1
24.3 Replacing a Battery ....................................................................................................................................................................................24-2
24.4 Battery Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................................................................24-2
24.5 Battery Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................................24-3
24.6 Battery Recycling ........................................................................................................................................................................................24-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
9
25 Care and Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................................... 25-1
25.1 General Points .............................................................................................................................................................................................25-1
25.2 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................................................................25-2
25.3 Disinfecting ..................................................................................................................................................................................................25-2
25.4 Sterilization ..................................................................................................................................................................................................25-2
26 User Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................... 26-1
26.1 General Inspection ....................................................................................................................................................................................26-1
26.2 Maintenance and Testing Schedule ....................................................................................................................................................26-2
26.3 Checking Monitor and Module Information ....................................................................................................................................26-3
26.4 ECG Verification ..........................................................................................................................................................................................26-3
26.5 NIBP Leakage Test ......................................................................................................................................................................................26-3
26.6 CO2 Leakage Test ........................................................................................................................................................................................26-4
26.7 AG Tests ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................26-5
26.7.1 AG Leakage Test ............................................................................................................................................................................26-5
26.8 Calibrating the Touchscreen ..................................................................................................................................................................26-5
26.9 Entering/Exiting Demo Mode ...............................................................................................................................................................26-5
27 Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................... 27-1
27.1 ECG Accessories ..........................................................................................................................................................................................27-1
27.2 SpO2 Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................................................27-2
27.3 NIBP Accessories .........................................................................................................................................................................................27-3
27.4 Temp Accessories .......................................................................................................................................................................................27-4
27.5 IBP/ICP Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................................................27-4
27.6 C.O. Accessories ..........................................................................................................................................................................................27-5
27.7 CO2 Accessories ...........................................................................................................................................................................................27-5
27.8 AG Accessories (for Passport 12 only) .................................................................................................................................................27-6
27.9 Others.............................................................................................................................................................................................................27-6
A Product Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1 Monitor Safety Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................................A-1
A.2 Power Supply Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 Physical Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................................A-2
A.4 Hardware Specifications ..............................................................................................................................................................................A-3
A.5 Data Storage ....................................................................................................................................................................................................A-4
A.6 Wireless Network ............................................................................................................................................................................................A-5
A.7 Measurement Specifications .....................................................................................................................................................................A-5
B EMC and Radio Regulatory Compliance .......................................................................................................................... B-1
B.1 EMC...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1
B.2 Radio Regulatory Compliance ................................................................................................................................................................... B-5
C Default Configurations ..................................................................................................................................................... C-1
C.1 Parameters Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 Routine Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................................C-12
C.3 User Maintenance Items ............................................................................................................................................................................C-15
10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
D Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................................... D-1
D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages .................................................................................................................................................................. D-1
D.2 Technical Alarm Messages.......................................................................................................................................................................... D-2
E Symbols and Abbreviations.............................................................................................................................................. E-1
E.1 Symbols .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. E-1
E.2 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................................................................... E-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11
12
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1 Safety
1.1 Safety Information
WARNING

Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION

Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in minor personal injury or
product/property damage.
NOTE

Provides application tips or other useful information to ensure that you get the most from your product.
1.1.1 Warnings
WARNINGS

Before putting the system into operation, the operator must verify that the equipment, connecting cables
and accessories are in correct working order and operating condition.

To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply mains with protective
earth. If a properly grounded power outlet is not available, operate the monitor on battery power.

The equipment is not intended to be used within the Magnetic Resonance (MR) environment.

To avoid an explosion hazard, do not use the equipment in the presence of oxygen-rich atmospheres,
flammable anesthetics, or other flammable agents (such as gasoline).

Before connecting the equipment to the power line, check that the voltage and frequency ratings of the
power line are the same as those indicated on the equipment’s label or in this manual.

Do not open the equipment housings. All servicing or future upgrades must be carried out by Mindray
trained and authorized personnel.

Do not come into contact with patients during defibrillation. Otherwise serious injury or death could result.

Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume to
a low level or off may result in a hazard to the patient. Remember that alarm settings should be customized
according to different patient situations and always keeping the patient under close surveillance is the most
reliable way for safe patient monitoring.

The physiological data and alarm messages displayed on the equipment should be reviewed by a clinician
before being used for diagnostic interpretation and treatment.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1-1
WARNINGS

To avoid inadvertent disconnection, route all cables in a way to prevent a stumbling hazard. Wrap and
secure excess cabling to reduce risk of entanglement by patients or personnel.

Do not touch the equipment’s metal parts or connectors when in contact with the patient; otherwise patient
injury may result.

Never mix patient electrode types or brands. Dissimilar metals or other incompatibilities may cause
considerable baseline drift and may increase trace recovery time after defibrillation.

To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure, ensure that the monitor’s cables
and transducers never come into contact with the electro-surgery unit (ESU).

The neutral electrode of the electro-surgery unit (ESU) shall properly contact the patient. Otherwise, burns
may result.

Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper performance of the equipment. For
this reason make sure that all external devices operated in the vicinity of the equipment comply with the
relevant EMC requirements. Mobile phone, X-ray equipment or MRI devices are a possible source of
interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic radiation.
1.1.2 Cautions
CAUTIONS

Only use parts and accessories specified in this manual.

Always install or carry the equipment properly to avoid damage caused by drop, impact, strong vibration or
other mechanical force.

Dry the equipment immediately in case of rain or water spray.

Ensure that the patient monitor is supplied with continuous electric power during work. Sudden power
failure may lead to data loss.

This equipment is intended for single patient use.

Store and use the equipment in specified environmental condition. The monitor and accessories may not
meet the performance specification due to aging, stored or used outside the specified temperature and
humidity range.
1.1.3 Notes
NOTES

Put the equipment in a location where you can easily view and operate the equipment.

During normal use, the operator is expected to face the front of the equipment.

The equipment uses a mains plug as a means of isolation to the mains power supply. Do not position the
equipment in a place difficult to operate the mains plug.

Keep this manual in the vicinity of the equipment so that it can be conveniently referenced when needed.

The software was developed in compliance with IEC60601-1-4. The possibility of hazards arising from
software errors is minimized.
1-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
NOTES

This manual describes all features and options. Your equipment may not have all of them.

At the end of its service life, the equipment, as well as its accessories, must be disposed of in compliance
with the guidelines regulating the disposal of such products. If you have any questions concerning disposal
of the equipment, please contact Mindray.

When disposing of the packaging material, be sure to observe the applicable waste control regulations and
keep it out of children’s reach.
1.2 Equipment Symbols
Some symbols may not appear on your equipment.
Caution
Power ON/OFF (for a part of the
equipment)
Battery indicator
Alternating current
VGA output
Equipotentiality
Graphical record
USB connector
Network connector
Zero key
Input/Output
Check sensor
Calibrate key
Measure/standby
Inserted direction
Gas outlet
Serial number
DATE OF MANUAFACTURE
Catalog number
Electrostatic sensitive devices
DEFIBRILLATION-PROOF TYPE CF APPLIED PART
DEFIBRILLATION-PROOF TYPE BF APPLIED PART
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1-3
The presence of this label indicates the machine was certified by ETL with the statement:
Conforms to AAMI Std ES 60601-1, IEC Std 60601-1-6, IEC Std 60601-1-8, IEC Std 60601-2-25, IEC Std
60601-2-26, IEC Std 60601-2-27, IEC Std 60601-2-34, IEC Std 60601-2-49, IEC Std 80601-2-30, ISO Std
80601-2-55, ISO Std 80601-2-56, ISO Std 80601-2-61
Certified to CSA Std C22.2 NO. 60601-1, NO. 60601-6, NO. 60601-1-8, NO. 60601-2-25, NO.
60601-2-26,NO. 60601-2-27, NO. 60601-2-34, NO. 60601-2-49, NO. 80601-2-30, NO. 80601-2-55, NO.
80601-2-56, NO. 80601-2-61
1-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2 The Basics
2.1 Intended Use
The Passport Series Patient Monitors, including Passport 8 and Passport 12, are intended to be used for monitoring,
displaying, reviewing, storing and alarming of multiple physiological parameters including ECG (3-lead, or 5-lead
selectable), arrhythmia detection and ST Segment analysis, heart rate (HR), respiration (Resp), temperature (Temp),
pulse oxygen saturation (SpO2), pulse rate (PR), non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP), invasive blood pressure (IBP),
cardiac output (C.O.), carbon dioxide (CO2), and anesthetic gas (AG).
All the parameters can be applied to single adult, pediatric or neonatal patients with the exception of the following:

C.O. monitoring is restricted to adult patients only;

PAWP monitoring is not intended for neonatal patients;

The Mortara ECG Algorithm arrhythmia detection and ST Segment analysis is intended for adult and
pediatric patients. The Mindray ECG Algorithm arrhythmia detection (currently unavailable in the US and
Canada) is intended for adult and pediatric patients, and the Mindray ECG Algorithm ST Segment analysis
(currently unavailable in the US and Canada) is intended for adult patients only.

Arrhythmia detection, ST Segment analysis and AG monitoring are available for Passport 12 Patient Monitors
only.
The monitors are to be used in healthcare facilities by clinical physicians or appropriate medical staff under the
direction of physicians.
2.2 Applied Parts
The applied parts of the Passport 8/12 patient monitors are:

ECG electrodes and leadwires,

SpO2 sensor

NIBP cuff

Temp probes

IBP transducer

C.O. sensor

CO2 sampling line/nasal sampling cannula, and water trap

AG sampling line, water trap, and airway adapter
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2-1
2.3 Main Unit
2.3.1 Front View
1
2
3
5
4
6
1.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Alarm lamp
When a physiological alarm or technical alarm occurs, this lamp flashes as defined below.
2-2

High level alarms:
the lamp quickly flashes red.

Medium level alarms:
the lamp slowly flashes yellow.

Low level alarms:
the lamp lights yellow without flashing.
2.
Display Screen
3.
AC power LED
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
4.
Power On/Off Switch

Pressing this switch turns the monitor on.

When the monitor is on, pressing and holding this switch turns the monitor off.
An indicator is built into this switch. It turns on when the monitor is on and turns off when the monitor is off.
5.
Battery LED

On:
when the battery is installed and the AC source is connected.

Off:
when no battery is installed or the installed battery is malfunctioning, or no AC source is
connected when the monitor is powered off.

Flashing:
when the monitor operates on battery power.
6.
Alarm Reset: Press to reset the alarms.
7.
Alarm Pause: Press to pause or restore alarms.
8.
Freeze: Press to freeze or unfreeze waveforms.
9.
Record: Press to start or stop recordings.
10. NIBP: Press to start or stop NIBP measurements.
11. Menu:
If no menu is currently displayed on the screen, pressing it enters the main menu. If a menu is currently displayed
on the screen, pressing it closes that menu.
12. Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise or counter-clockwise to move the cursor.

Press the knob to select one item, such as accessing a menu or confirming the selection.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2-3
2.3.2 Side View
Passport 12
1
1
4
3
2
7
5
8
6
9
10
2-4
1.
Handle
2.
Battery compartment
3.
Recorder
4.
Parameter module slot
5.
Temp probe 1 connector
6.
Temp probe 2 connector
7.
IBP cable connector
8.
SpO2 cable connector
9.
ECG cable connector
10.
NIBP cuff connector
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Passport 8
1
1
4
3
2
7
5
8
6
9
1.
Handle
2.
Battery compartment
3.
Recorder
4.
Parameter module slot
5.
Temp probe 1 connector
6.
Temp probe 2 connector
7.
SpO2 cable connector for
8.
ECG cable connector
9.
NIBP cuff connector
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2-5
2.3.3 Rear View
Passport 12
3
1
2
4
5
1.
AC Power Input
2.
Equipotential Grounding Terminal
6
7
When using the monitor together with other devices, connect their equipotential grounding terminals together
to eliminate the potential differences between them.
3.
Parameter Module Slot
Used for connecting the parameter modules.
4.
USB Connectors
Connects a USB drive for data or configuration transfer.
5.
Multifunctional Connector:
Outputs defibrillator synchronization signals, nurse call signals and analogy output signals.
2-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6.
Network Connector
A standard RJ45 connector which connects the monitor to the central station (CMS) or other monitor for remote
viewing. It also connects the monitor to a PC for a system upgrade.
7.
VGA Connector
Connects a secondary display, which extends the display capability of your monitor. The contents displayed on
the secondary display screen matches what displays on the monitor screen.
Passport 8
3
1
2
5
6
7
4
1.
8
Equipotential Grounding Terminal
When using the monitor together with other devices, connect their equipotential grounding terminals together
to eliminate the potential differences between them.
2.
AC Power Input
3.
Parameter Module Slot
Used for connecting the parameter modules.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2-7
4.
Multifunctional Connector
Outputs defibrillator synchronization signals, nurse call signals and analogy output signals.
5.
Reserved for future use
6.
USB Connectors
Connects a USB disk for data or configuration transfer.
7.
Network Connector
A standard RJ45 connector which connects the monitor to CMS or other monitor for remote view. It also connects
the monitor to PC for system upgrade.
8.
VGA Connector
Connects a secondary display, which extends the display capability of your monitor. The contents displayed on
the secondary display screen accords with those displayed on the monitor screen.
2.4 Modules
1
2
3
4
5
6
1.
IBP module:
contains IBP cable connector
2.
Sidestream CO2 module:
contains CO2 watertrap connector, and CO2 gas outlet.
3.
IBP+C.O. module:
contains IBP cable connector and C.O. cable connector.
4.
IBP+C.O. + sidestream CO2 module:
contains IBP cable connector, C.O. cable connector, CO2
watertrap connector, and CO2 gas outlet.
5.
IBP+C.O. + microstream CO2 module:
contains IBP cable connector, C.O. cable connector, CO2 sampling
line connector, and CO2 gas outlet.
6.
IBP+C.O.+AG module (with O2):
contains IBP cable connector, C.O. cable connector, AG watertrap
slot, and AG gas outlet. This module is for Passport 12 only.
NOTE

The above modules with IBP connectors support two invasive blood pressures through an IBP extended
cable (PN: 040-001029-00).
2-8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2.5 Display Screen
This patient monitor adopts a high-resolution LED screen to display patient parameters and waveforms. A typical
display screen is shown below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1.
9
Patient Information Area

This area shows date, time, and the patient information such as department, bed number, patient name and
patient category.
indicates that no patient is admitted or the patient information is incomplete. If no
patient is admitted, selecting this area enters the [Patient Setup] menu. For admitted patients, selecting
this area enters the [Patient Demographics] menu.
2.
Alarm Symbols

indicates alarms are paused.

indicates alarms are reset.

indicates alarm sounds are turned off.

indicates the system is in alarm off status.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2-9
3.
Technical Alarm Area
This area shows technical alarm messages and prompt messages. When multiple messages occur, the messages
scroll. Select this area and the technical alarm list displays.
4.
Physiological Alarm Area
This area shows physiological alarm messages. When multiple alarms occur, the messages scroll. Select this area
and the physiological alarm list displays.
5.
Waveform Area
This area shows measurement waveforms. The waveform name displays at the upper left corner of the waveform.
Select this area and the corresponding measurement setup menu displays.
6.
Parameter Area A
This area shows measurement parameters. Each monitored parameter has a parameter window and the
parameter name displays at the upper left corner. The corresponding waveform of each parameter displays in the
same row in the waveform area. Select this area and the corresponding measurement setup menu displays.
7.
Parameter Area B
For the digital parameters displayed in this area, their corresponding waveforms are not displayed.
8.
Prompt Message Area
This area shows the prompt messages, network status icons, and battery status icons, etc. For details about
battery status symbols, refer to chapter 24 Batteries.
9.

indicates the monitor is successfully connected to a wired network.

indicates the monitor has failed to connect to a wired network.

indicates the wireless function (optional) is working.

indicates the wireless function (optional) is not working.

indicates a USB drive is inserted.
QuickKeys Area
This area contains QuickKeys that provide quick access to functions.
2-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2.6 QuickKeys
A QuickKey is a configurable graphical key, located at the bottom of the main screen. They give you fast access to
functions. Their availability, and the order in which they appear on your screen, depend on your monitor
configuration.
The following QuickKeys are available:
Display more QuickKeys
Hide the QuickKeys
[Main Menu] QuickKey
Enter the [Main Menu]
[Standby] QuickKey
Enter Standby mode
[Alarm Setup] QuickKey
Change alarm settings
[Review] QuickKey
Review the patient’s data
[NIBP Measure] QuickKey
Enter the [NIBP Measurement] menu
[Stop All] QuickKey
Stop all NIBP Measurements
[Zero IBP] QuickKey
Zero IBP
[Realtime Print] QuickKey
Start the realtime print
[Print Setup] QuickKey
Print Setup
[Alarm Reset] QuickKey
Reset the alarms
[Alarm Pause] QuickKey
Pause or restore alarms
[Screens]
Change screen
[Patient Setup] QuickKey
Enter the [Patient Setup] menu
[Manual Event] QuickKey
Trigger a manual event
[Minitrends] QuickKey
Have a split-screen view of minitrends
[Volume Setup] QuickKey
Enter the [Volume Setup] menu
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2-11
[Load Config.] QuickKey
Default configurations
[Start C.O.] QuickKey
Start cardiac output procedure
[Calculations] QuickKey
Perform calculations
[Others] QuickKey
Have a split-screen view of another patient’s conditions
[OxyCRG] QuickKey
Have a split-screen view of OxyCRG trends
[7-Lead ECG] QuickKey
Enter the full-screen 7-lead ECG screen
[Parameters] QuickKey
Enter the [Parameters] menu
[NIBP STAT] QuickKey
Start NIBP STAT measurement
[Unit Setup] QuickKey
Enter the [Unit Setup] menu
[PAWP] QuickKey
Enter the PAWP measurement screen
[CPB Mode] QuickKey
Enter the CPB mode
[Privacy Mode] QuickKey
Enter the Privacy mode
[Night Mode] QuickKey
Enter the Night mode
You can configure up to four QuickKeys on the screen. To select your desired QuickKeys:
2-12
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[Manage Configuration >>]→enter the required password→[Ok].
2.
In the [Manage Configuration] menu, select [Edit Config.>>].
3.
In the pop-up menu, select the desired configuration and then select [Edit].
4.
In the pop-up menu, select [Screen Setup >>].
5.
Select the [Select QuickKeys] tab, and then configure your desired QuickKeys and the order of them.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3 Basic Operations
3.1 Installation
WARNING

Connect only approved devices to this equipment. Devices connected to the equipment must meet the
requirements of the applicable IEC standards (e.g. IEC 60950 safety standards for information technology
equipment and IEC 60601-1 safety standards for medical electrical equipment). The system configuration
must meet the requirements of the IEC 60601-1 medical electrical systems standard. Any personnel who
connect devices to the equipment’s signal input/output port is responsible for providing evidence that the
safety certification of the devices has been performed in accordance to the IEC 60601-1. If you have any
questions, please contact Mindray.

If it is not evident from the equipment specifications whether a particular combination with other devices is
hazardous, for example, due to summation of leakage currents, please consult the manufacturers or else an
expert in the field, to ensure the necessary safety of patients and all devices concerned will not be impaired
by the proposed combination.
CAUTION

The equipment should be installed by authorized Mindray personnel.
NOTE

The software equipment copyright is solely owned by Mindray. No organization or individual shall resort to
modifying, copying, or exchanging it or to any other infringement on it in any form or by any means without
due permission.
3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking
Before unpacking, examine the packing case carefully for signs of damage. If any damage is detected, contact the
carrier or Mindray.
If the packing case is intact, open the package and remove the equipment and accessories carefully. Check all
materials against the packing list and check for any mechanical damage. Contact Mindray in case of any problem.
CAUTION

When disposing of the packaging material, be sure to observe the applicable waste control regulations and
keep it out of children’s reach.

Before use, please verify whether the packages are intact, especially the packages of single use accessories.
In case of any damage, do not apply it to patients.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3-1
NOTE

Save the packing case and packaging material as they can be used if the equipment must be reshipped.
3.1.2 Environmental Requirements
The equipment operating environment must meet the requirements specified in this manual.
The equipment operating environment should be reasonably free from noises, vibration, dust, corrosive, flammable
and explosive substances. To maintain good ventilation, the equipment should be at least 2 inches (5 cm) away from
surrounding objects.
When the equipment is moved from one place to another, condensation may occur as a result of temperature or
humidity difference. In this case, never start the system before the condensation disappears.
CAUTION

Make sure that the equipment operating environment meets the specific requirements. Otherwise
unexpected consequences, e.g. damage to the equipment, could result.

Put the equipment in a location where you can easily see the screen, access the operating controls, and
disconnect the equipment from AC power.
3.2 Getting Started
3.2.1 Connecting to Power Source
Using AC Power Source
To use the AC power source, connect one end of the power cord with the AC power input on the equipment’s back
panel and the other end with a wall AC mains outlet.
WARNING

Always use the accompanying power cord with the monitor.

Use the battery if the integrity of the protective earth conductor or the protective earthing system in the
installation is in doubt.
Using a Battery
This monitor can be equipped with rechargeable lithium-ion battery. If a battery is installed, the monitor system
automatically switches to the battery for power if AC power is interrupted.
NOTE

When a battery has been stored for a long time, or the battery is depleted, recharge the battery at once.
Otherwise, the low battery may not be sufficient to power the monitor if the AC power is unavailable.
3-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Refer to Chapter 24 Batteries for detail.
Connecting Accessories
Insert the connector of accessory cables necessary for the measurements to be performed by your monitor to the
corresponding connector on the monitor. For details about the parameter connectors, refer to 2.3.2 Side View
3.2.2 Turning Power On
Once the monitor is installed, before beginning measurements:
1.
Check the monitor and plug-in modules for any mechanical damage, and make sure that all external cables,
plug-ins and accessories are properly connected.
2.
Check the power supply specification is met if mains power is used. Only use a power outlet that is properly
grounded.
3.
Plug the power cord into the AC power source. If you run the monitor on battery power, ensure that the battery
is sufficiently charged.
4.
Press the power on/off switch on the monitor’s front panel.
The monitor will perform alarm system self-test during start-up. After pressing the power on/off button, the system
shows a “Loading…” screen, sounds a beep and the alarm lamp simultaneously turns yellow, then red, and then turns
off, followed by the start-up screen being shown. Then the start-up screen disappears. The alarm system self-test
succeeds. The monitor enters the normal monitoring screen.
NOTE

Carefully check if the system performs the self-test as described above. Contact your service personnel or
Mindray if the self-test is abnormal.
WARNING

Do not use the monitor on a patient if you suspect it is not working properly, or if it is mechanically
damaged. Contact your service personnel or Mindray.
3.2.3 Starting Monitoring
1.
Decide which measurements you want to take.
2.
Connect the required modules, patient cables and sensors.
3.
Make sure that the patient cables and sensors are correctly connected.
4.
Make sure that the patient settings, such as [Patient Cat.], [Paced], etc, are appropriate for your patient.
5.
Refer to the appropriate measurement section for details of how to perform the measurements you require.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3-3
3.3 Turning Off the Monitor
Before turning off the monitor,:
1.
Ensure that the monitoring of the patient has been completed. .
2.
Disconnect the cables and sensors from the patient.
3.
Make sure to save or clear the patient monitoring data as required.
4.
Press and hold the power on/off switch for more than 2seconds to turn off the monitor. “Shutting down…” is
displayed on the screen and then the monitor shuts down.
CAUTION

Press and hold the power on/off switch for 10 seconds to forcibly shut down the monitor if it could not be
shut down normally. This may cause loss of patient data.

The monitor restores the latest configuration if it restarts within 60 seconds after a power failure. The
monitor restores the default configuration, rather than the latest configuration, if it restarts 120 seconds
after a power failure. The monitor may load either the latest configuration or the default configuration if it
restarts from 60-120 seconds after a power failure.

Power failure may cause data corruption on the SD card. It is recommended to turn off the monitor
according to the normal procedures. Do not directly unplug the power cord, unless a charged battery is
installed, or remove the battery before shutting down the monitor.
NOTE

To completely disconnect the power supply, unplug the power cord.
3.4 Using the Knob
Using the knob on the front panel of the monitor can do the following operations:

Rotate the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to move the cursor.

Press the knob to select one item, such as accessing a menu or confirming the selection.
3.5 Using Keys
The monitor has three types of keys:

Softkey: A softkey is a graphic key on the screen, giving you fast access to certain menus or functions. The
monitor has two types of softkeys:

Parameter keys: Each parameter area can be seen as a softkey. You can enter a parameter setup menu by
selecting its corresponding parameter or waveform area.

QuickKeys: QuickKeys are configurable graphical keys, located at the bottom of the main screen. For details,
refer to the section 2.6 QuickKeys.

Hardkeys: A hardkey is a physical key on a monitoring device, such as the [Main Menu] hardkey on the monitor’s
front panel.
3-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual

Pop-up Keys: Pop-up keys are task-related keys that appear automatically on the monitor screen when needed.
For example, the Confirm pop-up key appears only when you need to confirm a change.
3.6 Using the Touchscreen
Select screen items by pressing them directly on the monitor’s screen. You can enable or disable touchscreen
operation by pressing and holding the [Main Menu] QuickKey for 3 seconds. A padlock symbol
displays if
touchscreen operation is disabled.
3.7 Using the On-screen Keyboard
The on-screen keyboard enables you to enter information.

Use the
key to delete the previously entered character.

Use the
key to toggle between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Select

Select

Select
to confirm what you have entered and close the on-screen keyboard.
to access the symbol keyboard.
to exit the symbol keyboard.
3.8 Using the Main Menu
To enter the [Main Menu], select the [Main Menu] on-screen QuickKey or the [Menu] hardkey on the monitor’s front
panel. Most of monitor operations and settings can be performed through this [Main Menu].
1
4
2
3
Other menus are similar to the [Main Menu] and contain the following parts:
1.
Heading: displays the title for the current menu.
2.
Main body: displays options, buttons, prompt messages, etc. The menu buttons with “>>’’ open a secondary
window to reveal more options or information.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3-5
3.
4.
Online help area: displays help information for the highlighted menu item.
: select to exit the current menu. If changes are made in the menu, they take effect after selecting this button.
3.9 Setting the Screen
You can enter the [Screen Setup] window as shown below by selecting [Main Menu] → [Screen Setup] →
[Screen Layout >>]. In this window, you can arrange the positions of the parameters and waveforms. Unselected
parameters or waveforms will not display.
Area A
Area C
Area B
The ECG parameter and the first ECG waveform always display in the first row. The configurable areas can be classified
as Area A, Area B, and Area C.

In Area A, you can choose to display the parameter windows and their waveforms (if one exists). Each parameter
and the associated waveform are displayed in the same row.

In Area B, you can choose to display the parameter windows. But if all parameters in area C are set to [Off], both
the parameter and waveform selected in the first row of area B will be displayed.

In Area C, you can choose to display the timer and any parameters without associated waveforms.
The screen automatically adjusts to ensure the best view based on your screen setup.
If no corresponding parameter or waveform displays after the module is inserted, perform the following inspections:

Check the connection between the module and lead, cable, sensor, or external device.

Enter the [Screen Setup] window for the desired display configuration by selecting [Main Menu] → [Screen
Setup] → [Screen Layout >>].

Check that the parameter is turned on in [Parameters Switch] window.
CAUTION

Unallocated parameters in the [Screen Setup] window will not display. However, the monitor still sounds
alarms for these parameters.
3-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3.10 Displaying the Timer
To display the timer in the main screen:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup>>]→[Screen Layout >>] to access the [Screens] window.
2.
Select [Screen Setup] tab.
3.
In Area C, select [Timer] from the drop-down list of the desired parameter area. Refer to section 3.9 Setting the
Screen.
4.
Select

Select [Start] or [Pause] to start or pause timing.

Select [Clear] to clear current timing result.

Select [Setup] to access the [Timer Setup] window, in which you can set the [Direction] to [Up] or [Down]. If you
to exit the window. The main screen will display the timer.
select [Down], you should set:

[Run Time(h:min:s)]: The available time range is 0 to 100 hours, and the default time is 5 minutes.

[Reminder Vol]: During the last 10 seconds of the countdown, the system issues reminder tone. The
available volume range is 0 to 10. 0 means off, and 10 the maximum volume.
3.11 Changing General Settings
This chapter covers only general settings such as language, brightness, date and time, etc. Refer to measurement and
other settings in their respective sections.
3.11.1 Setting up a Monitor
To install a monitor or change its location:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
In the [User Maintenance] menu, set [Monitor Name], [Department] and [Bed No.], or edit their settings.
3.11.2 Changing Language
To change the language:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
In the [User Maintenance] menu, select [Language] and then select the desired language.
3.
Restart the monitor.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3-7
NOTE

The changed language is applied only after the monitor is restarted.
3.11.3 Adjusting the Screen Brightness
To adjust the screen brightness:
1.
Select the [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Brightness].
2.
Select the appropriate setting for the screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, and 1 is the dimmest.
If the monitor operates on battery power, setting a dimmer screen brightness will prolong the battery operating time.
When the monitor enters Standby mode, the screen automatically changes to the dimmest setting.
3.11.4 Showing/Hiding Help Text
The monitor provides online help information. The user can display or hide the help text as needed.
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>].
2.
Select [Help] and select either [On] or [Off].
3.11.5 Setting the Date and Time
To set the date and time:
1.
Select [Main Menu] →[Maintenance >>]→[System Time >>].
2.
Set the date and time.
3.
Select [Date Format] and select either [yyyy-mm-dd], [mm-dd-yyyy] or [dd-mm-yyyy].
4.
Select [Time Format] and select either [24h] or [12h].
If your monitor is connected to a central station (CMS), the date and time are automatically synchronized to that CMS.
In that case, you cannot change the date and time settings on your monitor.
CAUTION

Changing date and time affects the storage of trends and events and may cause data loss. Save or record
any needed data prior to changing the date and time.
3.11.6 Adjusting Volume
Alarm Volume
To adjust the alarm volume:
1.
Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Alarm Setup >>]→ [Others].
2.
Select [Alm Volume] and then select the appropriate volume: X-10, in which X is the minimum volume,
depending on the set minimum alarm volume (refer to the chapter Alarm), and 10 is the maximum volume.
3-8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Key Volume
When you press the navigation knob, the touchscreen, or the hardkeys on the panel, the monitor prompts you by
making a sound of the key volume you have set.
To adjust the key volume:
1.
Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>].
2.
Select [Key Volume] and then select the appropriate volume. 0 means off, and 10 is the maximum volume.
QRS Volume
The QRS tone is derived from either the HR or PR, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source in
[ECG Setup] or [SpO2 Setup]. When monitoring SpO2, there is a variable pitch tone which changes as the patient’s
saturation level changes. The tone pitch rises as the saturation level increases and falls as the saturation level
decreases. The tone volume is user adjustable.
To adjust the QRS volume
1.
Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey, or the ECG parameter window→[Others >>], or the SpO2 parameter
window.
2.
Select [QRS Volume] or [Beat Vol] and then select the appropriate volume. 0 means off, and 10 is the maximum
volume.
3.12 Setting Parameters
3.12.1 Switching the Parameters On/Off
To switch the parameters on or off, select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Screen Layout >>]→[Parameters
Switch]. When a parameter is switched off, its corresponding parameter module stops working, and its parameter
value and waveform are not shown on the monitor display.
NOTE

ECG is always selected, and you can not switch it off.
3.12.2 Accessing the Parameters Menu
Select [Parameters >>] from the [Main Menu] or select corresponding parameter area or waveform area to access a
parameter setup menu.
3.13 Operating Modes
Your monitor has different operating modes. Some are password protected. This section lists the major operating
modes.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
3-9
3.13.1 Monitoring Mode
This is the normal, everyday working mode that you use for monitoring patients. Your monitor automatically enters
the Monitoring mode after being turned on.
3.13.2 Night Mode
To avoid disturbing the patient, Night mode may be used.
To activate the Night mode:
1.
Select the [Night Mode] QuickKey or [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Night Mode >>].
2.
In the pop-up menu, set the desired brightness, alarm volume, QRS volume, key volume, NIBP end tone, or
whether to stop NIBP measurements or not. When [Stop NIBP] is selected, all the NIBP measurements terminate
after entering the Night mode.
3.
Select the [Enter Night Mode] button.
To cancel the Night mode:
1.
Select the [Night Mode] QuickKey or [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Night Mode >>].
2.
Select [Ok] in the pop-up.
CAUTION

Before entering Night mode, confirm the brightness settings, alarm volume, QRS volume, and key volume.
Consider the potential risk when the setting value is low.
3.13.3 Privacy Mode
Privacy mode is only available when an admitted patient at a monitor is also monitored by the CMS.
To activate the Privacy mode, select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Privacy Mode].
The monitor does the following after activating Privacy mode:

The screen turns blank and the message [Under monitoring. Press any key to exit the privacy mode.] displays.

Monitoring and data storing continue but patient data is only visible at the CMS.

Alarms can still be triggered. But all audible alarms are suppressed and the alarm light is deactivated at the
monitor.

All system sounds are suppressed, including heart beat tone, pulse tone, all prompt tones, etc.
To cancel the Privacy mode, press any key.
The monitor exits the Privacy mode automatically in any of the following situations:

The monitor disconnects from the CMS.

The alarm [Battery Too Low] or [System will shut down soon. Please replace the batteries or use the
external power.] is presented.
3-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
The touchscreen is locked automatically in the Privacy mode.
WARNING

During Privacy Mode, all audible alarms are suppressed and the alarm light is deactivated at the monitor.
Alarms sound only at the CMS.
3.13.4 Demo Mode
Demo mode is password protected, and it is used for demonstration purposes only.
To enter Demo mode:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>].
2.
Select [Demo >>] →enter the required password and then select [Ok].
To exit Demo mode:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>].
2.
Select [Exit Demo]→[Ok].
WARNING

The Demo mode is for demonstration purposes only. To avoid the potential risk of the simulated data being
mistaken for the monitored patient’s data, do not enter the Demo Mode while monitoring a patient.
Otherwise, improper patient monitoring and delayed treatment could occur.
3.13.5 Standby Mode
In Standby mode, you can temporarily stop patient monitoring without turning off the monitor. To enter the Standby
mode, select the [Standby] QuickKey
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
.
3-11
FOR YOUR NOTES
3-12
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
4 Managing Patients
4.1 Admitting a Patient
The monitor displays physiological data and stores it in trends as soon as a patient is connected. This allows you to
monitor a patient that is not admitted yet. However, it is recommended that you admit a patient so that you can clearly
identify them on recordings, reports and networking devices.
To admit a patient:
1.
Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].
2.
Select [Discharge Patient] to clear any previous patient data. If you do not erase data from the previous patient,
the new patient’s data is combined with the previous patient’s data. The monitor makes no distinction between the
old and the new patient data.
3.
4.
If [Discharge Patient] button appears dimmed, directly select [Admit Patient] and then select:

[Yes] to apply the data saved in the monitor to the new patient, or

[No] to clear the data saved in the monitor.
In the [Patient Demographics] menu, enter the demographic details, of which:

[Patient Cat.] allows the user to select patient size (Neo, Ped, Adu) which will determine the way your monitor
processes and calculates some measurements, and what safety and alarm limits are applied for your patient.

[Paced] determines whether to show pace pulse marks on the ECG waveform. When the [Paced] is set to [No],
pace pulse marks are not shown in the ECG waveform.
5.
Select [Ok].
WARNING

The [Patient Cat.] and [Paced] fields always contain a value, regardless of whether the patient is fully
admitted or not. If you do not specify settings for these fields, the monitor uses the default settings from the
current configuration, which might not be correct for your patient.

For paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [Yes]. If it is incorrectly set to [No], the monitor could mistake a
pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak.

For non-paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [No].
4.2 Quick Admitting a Patient
Use [Quick Admit] only if you do not have the time or information to fully admit a patient. Complete the rest of the
patient demographic details later. Otherwise, the
symbol always displays in the patient information area.
1.
Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].
2.
Select [Quick Admit]. If a patient has been admitted, select [Ok] to discharge the current patient. If no patient is
admitted, you can choose either:
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
4-1
3.

[Yes] to apply the data in your monitor to the new patient, or

[No] to clear any previous patient data.
Enter the Patient Category and Paced Status for the new patient, and then select [Ok].
4.3 Querying and Obtaining Patient Information
The monitor can obtain patient information from Hospital Information System (hereafter called HIS) through the
eGateway. To query or obtain patient information from the HIS:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→[Network
Setup >>]→[Gateway Comm Setup >>], and set [IP Address] and [Port]. Set [ADT Query] to [On]. Then select
[Ok]
2.
Select the patient information area to enter the [Patient Demographics] menu.
3.
Select [Obtain Patient Info. >>] to enter the [Obtain Patient Information] menu.
4.
Input a query condition and then select [Query]. The monitor displays the requested patient information.
5.
Select a patient and then click [Import] to update the corresponding patient information.
6.
Select
to exit the [Obtain Patient Information] menu.
NOTE

The option [Obtain Patient Information] is available in the [Patient Setup] menu only when [ADT Query] is
set to [On].

When obtaining patient information from the HIS, only patient information is updated on the monitor. The
patient’s physiological data is not changed and the patient is not discharged.
4.4 Associating Patient Information
After associating patient information with the HIS, the monitor automatically updates the patient information if the
corresponding HIS information changes. The monitor can associate the patient’s MRN (Medical Record Number), first
name, last name, date of birth, and gender with the HIS.
NOTE

A keyword takes effect only when being defined in the eGateway. Refer to eGateway Integration Manager
Installation Guide (P/N: 046-002447-00) for details.

The monitor displays corresponding patient information only when all the keywords have been entered.
4.5 Editing Patient Information
To edit the patient information after a patient has been admitted, when the patient information is incomplete, or when
you want to change the patient information:
4-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1.
Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].
2.
Select [Patient Demographics] and then make the required changes.
3.
Select [Ok].
4.6 Discharging a Patient
To discharge a patient:
1.
Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].
2.
Select [Discharge Patient]. In the pop-up menu, you can either:

Select [Ok] to discharge the current patient, or

Select [Standby] then [Ok]. The monitor enters the Standby mode after discharging the current patient, or

Select [Cancel] to exit without discharging the patient.
NOTE

Discharging a patient clears all history data stored in the monitor.
4.7 Transferring Patient Data
You can transfer patient data between monitors with a USB drive without re-entering the patient demographic
information. Transferring of patient data enables you to review the patient’s condition history. The patient data that can
be transferred includes: patient demographics, trend data, alarm events and parameter alarm limits.
From the [User Maintenance] menu, select [Others >>]. In the pop-up menu, you can set [Transferred Data Length].
The default is [4 h]. You can also set [Data Transfer Method]. The default is [Off].
WARNING

Do not discharge a patient before the patient is successfully transferred.

After a patient is successfully transferred, check if the patient settings (especially patient category, paced
status and alarm limits settings, etc) on the monitor are appropriate for this patient.
NOTE

The system automatically enables the HR alarm and lethal arrhythmia alarm after transferring the patient
data.
4.7.1 Transferring Data from the Monitor to a USB Drive
To transfer data from the monitor to a USB drive:
1.
Connect a USB drive into the monitor’s USB port. Select [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].
2.
Select [Transfer to Storage Medium]. In the pop-up menu, you can:

Select [Ok] to transfer the patient data, or
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
4-3

3.
Select [Cancel] to exit the menu.
Wait until the following message appears: [Transfer to storage medium successful. Please remove the USB
drive.].
4.
Remove the USB drive from monitor.
4.7.2 Transferring Data from a USB Drive to the Monitor
To transfer data from a USB drive to the monitor:
1.
Connect the USB drive to the destination monitor.
2.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password → [Others >>]
→ [Data Transfer Method] →[USB Drive]. Then:
3.

Select [Transfer] to transfer the patient data to the monitor, or

Select [Cancel Transfer] to cancel the transfer operation.

Select [Unload USB Drive] to unload the USB drive without transferring the patient data.
After you select [Transfer], in the pop-up menu you can select the patient data contents that need to be
transferred. [Patient Demographics] must be selected. After [Ok] is selected, the monitor compares the patient
information stored in both the storage medium and monitor and manages the patient data based on the following.


Different
The monitor erases all the current patient data, transfers the patient data from the
Patient:
storage medium, and loads the configuration according to the patient category.
Same Patient:
In the pop-up dialog box, you can:

Select [Yes] to merge the patient data in the monitor and storage medium.

Select [No] to erase all the current patient data in the monitor and transfer the
patient data from the storage medium.
4.
Wait until the message [Transfer from storage medium successful.] appears before removing the USB drive.
CAUTION

The USB drive you use may be write-protected. In this case, make sure the USB drive is in read/write mode.

Do not remove the storage medium during data transfer process. Otherwise, data files may be damaged.

The normal monitoring function will be affected during data export. Do notperform any monitoring activity
during data export.
4.8 Connecting to a CMS
If your monitor is connected to a CMS:

All patient information, measurement data and settings on the monitor can be transferred to the CMS.

All patient information, measurement data and settings can be displayed simultaneously on the monitor and CMS.
For some functions such as editing patient information, admitting a patient, discharging a patient,
starting/stopping NIBP measurements, etc., bi-directional control can be achieved between your monitor and the
CMS.
For details, refer to the CMS’s instructions for use.
4-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5 Managing Configurations
5.1 Introduction
When performing continuous patient monitoring, the clinical professional often needs to adjust the monitor’s settings
according to the patient’s condition. The collection of all these settings is called a configuration. Allowing you to
configure the monitor more efficiently, the monitor provides different sets of configurations to accommodate the
varying patient categories and departments. You can change the settings from a default configuration and then save it
as a user configuration.
The default configurations provided for your monitor are department-oriented. You can choose either from:

General

OR

ICU

NICU

CCU
Each department has three different sets of configurations: one for each patient category [Neo], [Ped], and [Adu].
NOTE

The configuration management function is password protected. The configuration management tasks must
be performed by clinical professionals.
The system configuration items can be classified as:

Parameter configuration items
These items relate to parameters, e.g., waveform gain, alarm switch, alarm limits.

Conventional configuration items
These items define how the monitor works, e.g., screen layout, record, print and alarm settings.

User maintenance items
These items relate to user maintenance settings, e.g., unit setup, time format and data format.
For the important configuration items and their default values and user maintenance items, see appendix C Default
Configurations.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5-1
5.2 Entering the [Manage Configuration] Menu
To access the [Manage Configuraion] menu:
1.
Press the [Menu] hardkey on the monitor’s front panel to enter the [Main Menu].
2.
Select [Maintenance >>]→[Manage Configuration >>]. Enter the required password and then select [Ok].
5.3 Changing Department
If the current department configuration is not the one you want to view, you can select [Change Department >>] in the
[Manage Configuration] menu and then choose the one you want for viewing as shown below.
NOTE

5-2
Changing the department will delete all current user configurations.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5.4 Setting Default Configuration
The monitor will load the pre-set default configuration in the following cases:

The monitor restarts after being switched off for more than 120 seconds.

A patient is admitted.

A patient is discharged.

Patient data is cleared.

Patient category is changed.
To set the default configuration:
1.
Select [Select Default Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.
2.
In the [Select Default Config.] menu, select [Load the Latest Config.] or [Load Specified Config.].
When you select [Load Specified Config.], the restored configuration is subject to the patient category (adult, pediatric
or neonate). This configuration can be either factory configuration or a saved user configuration. As an example, select
[Default Adu Config.] and then select [Defaults] or user configuration(s).
When you select [Load the Latest Config], the latest configuration when the monitor is started or a patient is admitted
is loaded.
NOTE

To identify which configuration is restored when the monitor starts, enter the main screen to check the
prompt information at the lower part of the screen (displayed for about 10 seconds).
5.5 Saving Current Settings
Current settings can be saved as a user configuration. Up to 5 user configurations can be saved.
To save current settings:
1.
Select [Save Current Settings As >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.
2.
In the pop-up dialog box, enter the configuration name and then select [Ok]. The current settings are saved as a
user configuration with the name you entered.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5-3
5.6 Editing Configurations
To edit a configuration:
1.
Select [Edit Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu. The following menu appears.
2.
The pop-up menu shows the existing monitor configurations. Selecting [Config. on USB drive >>] will show the
existing configurations on the USB drive. Select the desired configuration and then select the [Edit] button. The
following menu appears.
3.
Select [Alarm Setup >>], [Screen Setup >>] or [Parameters >>] to enter the corresponding menu in which
settings can be changed. The changed alarm setup items will be marked in red.
4.
You can select [Save] or [Save as] to save the changed configuration. Select [Save] to overwrite the original
configuration. Select [Save as] to save the changed configuration as another file with another name.
5-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5.7 Deleting a Configuration
To delete a configuration:
1.
Select [Delete Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.
2.
The pop-up menu shows the existing monitor’s user configurations. Selecting [Config. on USB drive >>] will show
the existing user configurations on the USB drive. Select the user configurations you want to delete and then select
[Delete].
3.
Select [Yes] in the pop-up.
5.8 Transferring a Configuration
When installing several monitors with identical user configurations it is not necessary to set each unit separately. Use a
USB drive to transfer the configuration from monitor to monitor.
To export the current monitor’s configuration:
1.
Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.
2.
Select [Export Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.
In the [Export Config.] menu, select the configurations and [User Maintenance Settings] to export. Then select
the [Export] button. A status message will report completion of the transfer.
To import the configuration from the USB drive to the monitor:
1.
Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.
2.
Select [Import Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.
3.
In the [Import Config.] menu, select the configurations and [User Maintenance Settings] to import. Then select
the [Import] button. A status message will report completion of the transfer.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
5-5
5.9 Loading a Configuration
You may make changes to some settings during operation. However, these changes or the pre-selected configuration
may not be appropriate for the newly admitted patient. Therefore, the monitor allows you to load a desired
configuration to ensure that all the settings are appropriate for your patient.
To load a configuration,
1.
Select [Load Configuration >>] from the [Main Menu]. The pop-up menu shows the existing configurations on the
monitor.
2.
Selecting [Config. on USB drive >>] to show the existing configurations on the USB drive.
3.
Select a desired configuration.
4.
Select [View] to see the configuration details. In the pop-up menu, you can select [Alarm Setup >>], [Screen
Setup >>] or [Parameter >>] to view the corresponding contents. The alarm setup items which are different than
those currently used are marked in red.
5.
Select [Load].
5.10 Restoring the Latest Configuration Automatically
During operation, you may make changes to some settings. However, these changes may not be saved as a user
configuration. To prevent the changes from being lost in case of a sudden power failure, the monitor stores the
configuration in real time. The saved configuration is the latest configuration.
The monitor restores the latest configuration if it restarts within 60 seconds after the power failure. And it will restore the
default configuration rather than the latest configuration if it restarts 120 seconds after the power failure. The monitor
loads either the latest configuration or the default configuration if it restarts from 60-120 seconds after the power failure.
5.11 Modifying Password
To modify the password for accessing the [Manage Configuration] menu:
5-6
1.
Select [Modify Password >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.
2.
Input a new password in the pop-up menu.
3.
Select [Ok].
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6 User Screens
6.1 Configuring Your Screens
You can configure your monitor’s screens by setting:

Waveform line size

The color in which each measurement’s numerics and waveforms are displayed

The parameter to monitor.
Changing some settings may be hazardous. Therefore, those settings are password-protected and can be modified by
authorized personnel only. Once a change is made, notify those who use the monitor.
6.1.1 Changing the Waveform Line Size
To change the waveform line size:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Others >>].
3.
Select [Wave Line] and select [Thick], [Med] or [Thin].
6.1.2 Changing Measurement Colors
To change the measurement colors:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Measurement Color Setup >>].
2.
Select the color box next to your desired parameter and then select a color from the pop-up menu.
6.1.3 Changing Screen Layout
Select the [Screens] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Screen Layout >>] to enter the [Screens] menu.

You can choose the desired screen type in the [Choose Screen] window.

You can select the parameters and waveforms you want to view in the [Screen Setup] window. For details, please
refer to the section 3.9 Setting the Screen.

You can select the parameters you want to view on the big numerics screen in the [Big Numerics Screen Setup]
window.

You can switch the connected parameter modules on or off in the [Parameters Switch] window. If a parameter
module is switched off, parameter values and waveforms will not display on the screen.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6-1
6.2 Viewing Minitrends
6.2.1 Having a Split-Screen View of Minitrends
You can split the normal screen so that the left hand side continuously shows graphic minitrends beside waveforms as
shown in the figure below.
To have a split-screen view of minitrends:

Select the [Minitrends] QuickKey, or

Select the [Screens] QuickKey →
[Choose Screen]→ [Minitrends Screen]→ , or

Select [Main Menu] →
[Screen Setup >>] →[
Screen Layout >>] →
[Choose Screen]→ [Minitrends Screen]→ .
Minitrends View
The split-screen view provides minitrends for multiple parameters. In each field, the label and scale are respectively
displayed at the top and left. The time is displayed at the bottom of the minitrends view as shown below.
Time
6.2.2 Setting Minitrends
Select the minitrends area. From the pop-up [Minitrend Setup] menu:
6-2

Select the parameters to be displayed, or

Select [Minitrend Length] and then select the appropriate setting.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6.3 Viewing OxyCRG
To have a split screen view of oxyCRG:

Select the [OxyCRG] QuickKey;

Select the [Screens] QuickKey→[Choose Screen]→ [OxyCRG Screen]→ ; or,

Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Screen Layout >>]→[Choose Screen]→ [OxyCRG Screen]→
1
2
3
4
5
.
6
The split-screen view covers the lower part of the waveform area and shows HR trend, SpO2 trend, RR trend, and a
compressed waveform (Resp or CO2 waveform). At the bottom, there are controls:
1.
Event
You can enter the [Review] menu by selecting the [Event] button.
2.
Trend length list box
In the trend length list box, you can select [1 min], [2 min], [4 min], or [8 min].
3.
Setup
Select the [Setup] button to enter the [Setup] menu, in which you can select the parameters for display, the time
length to be saved before and after an event, and the scale of the graphic trends and waveform. The trend area can
display two parameter trends, e.g. HR trend and RR trend, simultaneously.
4.
Auto Scale
Select the [Auto Scale] button, and the system automatically adjusts the scaling.
5.
Print
Select [Print] to print the real-time OxyCRG to a printer.
6.
Record
Select [Record] to print the currently displayed OxyCRG trends to the recorder.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6-3
6.4 Viewing Other Patients
6.4.1 Care Group
You can select up to 10 monitors (including telemetry) connected to the sameCMS into a care group. This lets you:

View information on the monitor screen from another bed in the same Care Group.

Be notified of physiological and technical alarm conditions at the other beds in the same Care Group.
To have a Care Group:
1.
Open the [View Other Patient] window by:

Selecting [Others] QuickKey, or

Selecting [Screens] QuickKey →
[Choose Screen]→View
[
Others Screen] → , or

Selecting [Main Menu] →
[Screen Setup >>] →[
Screen Layout >>] →
[Choose Screen]→[
View Others Screen] → .
2.
Select [Setup] in the [View Other Patient] window.
3.
Select the desired monitors from the [Connected Monitor List], and then select the
button. The selected
monitors constitute a Care Group.
NOTES

Monitors using software version prior to 05.17.00 cannot view or be viewed by monitors of software version
05.17.00 or later.
6.4.2 Viewing the Care Group Overview Bar
The Care Group overview bar is located at the bottom of the [View Other Patient] window. In the overview bar, the
department and bed label for any Care Group beds are displayed. For telemetry, # is displayed before the department
label. The color in which a Care Group bed appears matches its status:

Red: indicates the bed is having high-level physiological alarms or the telemetry is in alarm, such as nurse call or
event.

Yellow: indicates the bed is having medium-level or low-level physiological alarms, or medium-level technical
alarms.

Blue: indicates the bed is having low-level technical alarms.

Light grey: indicates the bed fails to be networked.

Dark grey: indicates the bed is in the Standby mode.
You can view a Care Group bed’s alarms by selecting it from the Care Group, and you can select the [View This Patient]
button to view the bed in the [View Other Patient] window.
For more details about Care Group alarms, refer to the chapter 24 Batteries.
6-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6.4.3 Understanding the View Other Patient Window
When you first open the [View Other Patient] window, the monitor automatically selects a device from the network to
display in the [View Other Patient] window.
4
1
5
2
3
The [View Other Patient] window covers the lower part of the waveform area and consists of:
1.
Information Area: shows the patient information (including department, bed number, patient name, etc.), network
status symbol.
2.
View Area: shows physiological waveforms and parameters. You can switch a waveform area to a parameter area by
selecting your desired waveform area and then selecting [Switch to Parameter Area], or switch a parameter area
to a waveform area by selecting your desired parameter area and then selecting [Switch to Waveform Area].
3.
Care Group Overview Bar. See section 6.4.2 Viewing the Care Group Overview Bar for information.
4.
Message Area: shows physiological, technical and prompt messages from the currently viewed monitor. It also
shows the alarm given by the device such as nurse call or event. By selecting this area, you can enter the [Alarm
Information List] to view all physiological, technical and prompt messages coming from the currently viewed
patient.
5.
[Alarm Reset] button: resets alarms from the currently viewed bed. Refer to section 7.8 Resetting Alarms.
When the [Reset Other Bed’s Alarms] is disabled, no button will appear here.
Additionally, you can change a waveform or parameter for viewing:

To change a waveform for viewing, select the waveform segment where you want a new waveform to appear and
then select the waveform you want from the pop-up menu.

To change a parameter for viewing, select the parameter window where you want a new parameter to appear and
then select the parameter you want from the pop-up menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6-5
WARNING

The data presented in the [View Other Patient] window has a delay. Do not rely on this window for realtime
data.

The
icon indicates network disconnection. You cannot view other monitors when this icon is
displayed.
6.5 Understanding the Big Numerics Screen
To enter the big numerics screen:
1.
Select the [Screens] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Screen Layout >>].
2.
Select [Big Numerics]→
.
You can select your desired parameters to display in this screen: select the [Screens] QuickKey→[Big Numerics Screen
Setup] and then select the parameters you want to view. For parameters having a waveform, the waveform will also be
displayed.
6-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7 Alarms
Alarms, triggered by an abnormal vital sign or technical issue with the monitor, as visually and audibly indicated to the
user.
WARNING

A potential hazard can exist if different alarm presets are used for the same or similar equipment in any
single area, e.g. an intensive care unit or cardiac operating room.

If your monitor is connected to a CMS, alarms can be controlled remotely. Remote suspension, inhibition,
and reset of monitor alarms via the CMS may cause a potential hazard. For details, refer to the CMS’s
operator’s manual.
For troubleshooting specific alarms, see appendix D Alarm Messages.
7.1 Alarm Categories
The monitor’s alarms can be classified into two categories: physiological alarms and technical alarms.
1.
Physiological alarms
Physiological alarms, also called patient status alarms, are triggered by a monitored parameter value that violates
set alarm limits or an abnormal patient condition. Physiological alarm messages are displayed in the physiological
alarm area.
2.
Technical alarms
Technical alarms, also called system status alarms, are triggered by a device malfunction or a patient data distortion
due to improper operation or mechanical problems. Technical alarm messages are displayed in the technical alarm
area.
Apart from the physiological and technical alarm messages, the monitor will show some messages telling the
system status or patient status. Messages of this kind are included in the prompt message category and usually
displayed in the prompt information area. Some prompt messages that indicate the arrhythmia events are
displayed in the physiological alarm area. For some measurements, their related prompt messages are displayed in
their respective parameter windows.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7-1
7.2 Alarm Levels
The monitor’s alarms can be classified into three severity categories: high level, medium level and low level.
High level
Physiological alarms
Technical alarms
Indicate that the patient is in a life
Indicate a severe device malfunction or an improper operation
threatening situation, such as Asystole,
which could make it possible that the monitor cannot detect
Vfib/Vtac and so forth, and emergency
critical patient status and thus threaten the patient’s life.
treatment is required.
Medium
Indicate that the patient’s vital signs
Indicate a device malfunction or an improper operation, which
level
appear abnormal and immediate
may not threaten the patient’s life, but may compromise the
treatment is required.
monitoring of vital physiological parameters.
Indicate that the patient’s vital signs
Indicate a device malfunction or an improper operation which
Low level
appear abnormal and immediate
may compromise a certain monitoring function, but will not
treatment may be required.
threaten the patient’s life.
7.3 Alarm Indicators
When an alarm occurs, the monitor will indicate it to the user through visual or audible alarm indications.

Alarm lamp

Alarm message

Flashing numerics

Audible alarm tones
7.3.1 Alarm Lamp
If a technical alarm or physiological alarm occurs, the alarm lamp will flash. The color and flashing frequency match the
alarm level as follows:

High level alarms:
the lamp quickly flashes red.

Medium level alarms:
the lamp slowly flashes yellow.

Low level alarms:
the lamp lights yellow without flashing.
7.3.2 Alarm Messages
When an alarm occurs, an alarm message will appear in the technical or physiological alarm area. For physiological
alarms, the asterisk symbols (*) before the alarm message match the alarm level as follows:

High level alarms:
***

Medium level alarms:
**

Low level alarms:
*
Additionally, the alarm message uses different background color to match the alarm level:

High level alarms:
red

Medium level alarms:
yellow

Low level alarms:
yellow
You can view the alarm messages by selecting the physiological or technical alarm area.
7-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7.3.3 Flashing Numeric
If an alarm triggered by an alarm limit violation occurs, the numeric of the measurement in alarm will flash every second,
and the corresponding alarm limit will also flash at the same frequency indicating the high or low alarm limit is violated.
7.3.4 Audible Alarm Tones
The alarm tone is distinct from heart beat tone, keystroke tone and pulse tone in frequency. This monitor has three alarm
tones and patterns: ISO, Mode 1 and Mode 2. For each pattern, the alarm tones identify the alarm levels as follows:



ISO pattern:

High level alarms:
triple+double+triple+double beep

Medium level alarms:
triple beep

Low level alarms:
single beep
Mode 1:

High level alarms:
high-pitched single beep

Medium level alarms:
double beep

Low level alarms:
low-pitched single beep
Mode 2:

High level alarms:
high-pitched triple beep

Medium level alarms:
double beep

Low level alarms:
low-pitched single beep
NOTE

When multiple alarms of different levels occur simultaneously, the monitor will select the highest level
alarm, light the alarm lamp and give alarm sounds accordingly, while all the alarm messages are displayed
circularly on the screen.

Some physiological alarms, such as Asystole, are exclusive. They have identical alarm tones and alarm lights
with normal high level physiological alarms, but their alarm messages are displayed exclusively. That is,
when an exclusive physiological alarm and a normal high level physiological alarm are triggered
simultaneously, only exclusive physiological alarm messages will be displayed.
7.3.5 Alarm Status Symbols
Apart from the aforementioned alarm indicators, the monitor still uses the following symbols telling the alarm status:

indicates alarms are paused.

indicates alarm is reset.

indicates the alarm sound is turned off.

indicates individual measurement alarms are turned off or the system is in alarm off status.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7-3
7.4 Alarm Tone Configuration
7.4.1 Setting the Minimum Alarm Volume
To set the minimum alarm volume:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.
3.
Select [Minimum Alarm Volume] and then select a value between 0 and 10.
The minimum alarm volume refers to the minimum value you can set for the alarm volume, which is not affected by user
or factory default configurations. The minimum alarm volume setting remains unchanged when the monitor shuts
down and restarts.
7.4.2 Changing the Alarm Volume
To change the alarm volume:
1.
Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey or the [Alarm Setup] QuickKey→[Others], or [Main Menu]→[Alarm
Setup >>]→[Others].
2.
Select the appropriate volume from [Alm Volume]: X to 10, in which X is the minimum volume, depending on the
set minimum alarm volume, and 10 the maximum volume.
3.
Select [High Alarm Volume] to set the high priority alarm volume as [Alm Volume+0], [Alm Volume+1] or [Alm
Volume+2].
4.
Select [Reminder Vol] to set the volume of the reminder tone as [High], [Med] or [Low].
When alarm volume is set to 0, the alarm sound is turned off and a
symbol appears in the alarm symbols area of the
screen.
7.4.3 Setting the Interval Between Alarm Sounds
You cannot change the interval between alarm tones if you choose mode 1 or 2 as your desired alarm tone pattern. For
these two patterns, the interval between alarm tones identifies the alarm levels as follows:


Mode 1:

Interval between high level alarm tones: continuously

Interval between medium level alarm tones:
5s

Interval between low level alarm tones:
20 s
Mode 2:

Interval between high level alarm tones:
1s

Interval between medium level alarm tones:
5s

Interval between low level alarm tones:
20 s
If you choose the ISO pattern, you can change the interval between alarm tones. To change the interval between alarm
tones:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.
3.
Select [High Alarm Interval (s)], [Med Alarm Interval (s)] and [Low Alarm Interval (s)] in order and then select
the appropriate settings.
7-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
WARNING

When the alarm sound is switched off, the monitor will give no audible alarm tones even if a new alarm
occurs. Therefore the user should be very careful about whether to switch off the alarm sound or not.

Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume to a low
level may result in a hazard to the patient. Always keep the patient under close surveillance.
7.4.4 Changing the Alarm Tone Pattern
To change the alarm tone pattern:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.
3.
Select [Alarm Sound] and then select [ISO], [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
NOTE

User or factory default configurations have no impact on the alarm tone pattern setup. The alarm tone
pattern remains unchanged after the monitor restarts.
7.4.5 Setting the Reminder Tones
When the alarm volume is set to zero, or the alarm tone is silenced or turned off, the monitor issues a periodic reminder
tone.
To set the reminder tones:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.

To switch the reminder tones on or off, select [Reminder Tones] and and then select [On] or [Off].

To set the interval between reminder tones, select [Reminder Interval] and then select [1min], [2min] or
[3min].
In addition, you can set the volume of alarm reminder tones. To set the volume of alarm reminder tones, select [Main
Menu]→[Alarm Setup >>]→[Others] or the [Alarm Setup] QuickKey→[Others]. Then, select [Reminder Vol] and then
select [High], [Medium] or [Low].
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7-5
7.5 Understanding the Alarm Setup Menu
Select the [Alarm Setup] QuickKey or [Main Menu]→[Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup], where you can:

Set alarm properties for all parameters.

Change ST alarm settings.

Change arrhythmia alarm settings.

Set the threshold for some arrhythmia alarms.

Change other settings.
NOTE

The On/Off column is only visible when used with a CMS. This column is not visible with Panorama CMS.
Refer to the chapter 8 Monitoring ECG for how to change ST alarm settings, how to change arrhythmia alarm settings
and how to set the threshold for some arrhythmia alarms.
7.5.1 Setting Alarm Properties for All Parameters
In the [Main Menu], select [Alarm Setup >>]→[Parameters]. You can review and set alarm limits, alarm switches, alarm
level and alarm recordings for all parameters.
When a measurement alarm occurs, automatic recording of all the measurement numerics and related waveforms is
possible when the measurement’s [On/Off] and [Record] are set on.
7-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
WARNING

Make sure that the alarm limit settings are appropriate for your patient before monitoring.

Setting alarm limits to extreme values may cause the alarm system to become ineffective. For example, high
oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a consideration, do NOT
set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching the alarm off.

When monitoring patients that are not continuously attended by a clinical operator, properly configure the
alarm system and adjust alarm settings as per the patient's condition.
7.5.2 Adjusting Alarm Limits Automatically
The monitor can automatically adjust alarm limits according to the measured vital signs. When auto limits are selected,
the monitor calculates safe auto limits based on the latest measured values.
To get accurate auto alarm limits, you need to collect a set of measured vital signs as a baseline. Then, in the [Main
Menu], select [Alarm Setup >>]→[Parameters]→[Auto Limits] →[Ok]. The monitor will create new alarm limits based
on the measured values.
Before applying these automatically created alarm limits, confirm if they are appropriate for your patient in the [Alarm
Setup Menu]. If not, you can adjust them manually. These alarm limits will remain unchanged until you select auto limits
again or adjust them manually.
The monitor calculates the auto limits based on the following guidelines:
Low alarm limit
Module
Parameter Adult/
pediatric
(HR × 0.8) or 40
ECG
HR/PR
Neonate
(HR – 30) or 90
High alarm limit
Adult/
pediatric
(HR × 1.25) or 240 (HR + 40) or 200
greater)
smaller)
(RR × 0.5) or 6 rpm (RR – 10) or 30 rpm (RR × 1.5) or 30
SpO2
RR
SpO2
NIBP-S
NIBP
NIBP-D
NIBP-M
range
Adult/pediatric: 35 to
bpm (whichever is bpm (whichever is bpm (whichever is bpm (whichever is 240
greater)
Resp
Neonate
Auto alarm limits
smaller)
Neonate: 55 to 225
(RR + 25) or 85 rpm Adult/pediatric: 6 to
(whichever is
(whichever is
rpm (whichever is (whichever is
55
greater)
greater)
smaller)
smaller)
Neonate: 10 to 90
Same as the
Same as the
Same as the
Same as the default Same as the
default alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit
(SYS × 0.68 + 10)
mmHg
(Dia × 0.68 + 6)
mmHg
(Mean × 0.68 + 8)
mmHg
(SYS – 15) or 45
mmHg (whichever
is greater)
(Dia – 15) or 20
mmHg (whichever
is greater)
(Mean – 15) or 35
mmHg (whichever
is greater)
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
(SYS × 0.86 + 38)
mmHg
(Dia × 0.86 + 32)
mmHg
(Mean × 0.86 +
35) mmHg
(SYS + 15) or 105
measurement range
Adult: 45 to 270
mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 45 to 185
is smaller)
Neonate: 35 to 115
(Dia + 15) or 80
Adult: 25 to 225
mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 25 to 150
is smaller)
Neonate: 20 to 90
(Mean + 15) or 95
Adult: 30 to 245
mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 30 to 180
is smaller)
Neonate: 25 to 105
7-7
Low alarm limit
Module
Parameter Adult/
pediatric
Temp
Ao/
(T1 + 0.5)°C
1 to 49°C
T2
(T2 – 0.5)°C
(T2 – 0.5) °C
(T2 + 0.5)°C
(T2 + 0.5)°C
1 to 49°C
Same as the
Same as the
Same as the
Same as the default Same as the
IBP-S
default alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit
(SYS × 0.68+10)
mmHg
IBP-D
(Dia × 0.68 + 6)
mmHg
P1-P4
PA
range
(T1 + 0.5)°C
LV/
pressure)
Neonate
(T1 – 0.5) °C
BAP/
(Arterial
pediatric
Auto alarm limits
(T1 – 0.5)°C
UAP/
FAP/
Adult/
T1
TD
IBP: ART/
Neonate
High alarm limit
IBP-M
(Mean × 0.68 + 8)
mmHg
(SYS – 15) or 45
mmHg (whichever
is greater)
(Dia – 15) or 20
mmHg (whichever
is greater)
(Mean – 15) or 35
mmHg (whichever
is greater)
(SYS × 0.86 + 38)
mmHg
(Dia × 0.86 + 32)
mmHg
(Mean × 0.86 +
35) mmHg
(SYS + 15) or 105
measurement range
Adult: 45 to 270
mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 45 to 185
is smaller)
Neonate: 35 to 115
(Dia + 15) or 80
Adult: 25 to 225
mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 25 to 150
is smaller)
Neonate: 20 to 90
(Mean + 15) or 95
Adult: 30 to 245
mmHg (whichever Pediatric: 30 to 180
is smaller)
IBP-S
SYS × 0.75
SYS × 0.75
SYS × 1.25
SYS × 1.25
IBP-D
Dia × 0.75
Dia × 0.75
Dia × 1.25
Dia × 1.25
IBP-M
Mean × 0.75
Mean × 0.75
Mean × 1.25
Mean × 1.25
IBP-M
Mean × 0.75
Mean × 0.75
Mean × 1.25
Mean × 1.25
0 to 32 mmHg:
0 to 32 mmHg:
0 to 32 mmHg:
0 to 32 mmHg:
Neonate: 25 to 105
3 to 120 mmHg
IBP:
CVP/
ICP/
LAP/
RAP/
3 to 40mmHg
UVP/
P1-P4
(Venous
pressure)
remains the same remains the same remains the same remains the same
EtCO2
CO2
32 to 35 mmHg:
32 to 35 mmHg:
32 to 35 mmHg:
32 to 35 mmHg:
29 mmHg
29 mmHg
41 mmHg
41 mmHg
35 to 45 mmHg:
35 to 45 mmHg:
35 to 45 mmHg:
35 to 45 mmHg:
(etCO2-6) mmHg
(etCO2-6) mmHg
(etCO2+6) mmHg (etCO2+6) mmHg
45 to 48 mmHg:
45 to 48 mmHg:
45 to 48 mmHg:
45 to 48 mmHg:
39 mmHg
39 mmHg
51 mmHg
51 mmHg
> 48 mmHg:
> 48 mmHg:
> 48 mmHg:
> 48 mmHg:
Same as the
measurement range
remains the same remains the same remains the same remains the same
FiCO2
awRR
Same as the default Same as the
N/A
awRR × 0.5 or 6
(awRR – 10) or 30 awRR × 1.5 or 30 (awRR + 25) or 85
default alarm limit alarm limit
measurement range
Adult/pediatric: 6 to
rpm (whichever is rpm (whichever is rpm (whichever is rpm (whichever is 55
greater)
7-8
Same as the
N/A
greater)
smaller)
smaller)
Neonate:10 to 90
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Low alarm limit
Module
Parameter Adult/
pediatric
EtCO2 (AG)
FiCO2 (AG)
AG
C.O.
Adult/
pediatric
Neonate
Auto alarm limits
range
Same as CO2 module
awRR × 0.5 or 6
awRR
Neonate
High alarm limit
awRR – 10 or 30
awRR × 1.5 or 30 awRR + 25 or 85
Adult/pediatric: 6 to
rpm (whichever is rpm (whichever is rpm (whichever is rpm (whichever is 55
greater)
greater)
smaller)
smaller)
FiAA/
Same as the
Same as the
Same as the
Same as the default Same as the
EtAA
default alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit
FiO2/
Same as the
EtCO2
default alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit
FiN2O/
Same as the
EtN2O
default alarm limit default alarm limit default alarm limit alarm limit
BT
Adult:
(BT – 1)°C
Same as the
Same as the
N/A
Same as the
Same as the
Adult:
(BT – 1)°C
Neonate: 10 to 90
measurement range
Same as the default Same as the
measurement range
Same as the default Same as the
N/A
measurement range
Same as the
measurement range
7.5.3 Setting Alarm Delay Time
You can set the alarm delay time for alarms of continuously measured parameters. If the alarm condition is resolved
within the delay time, the monitor will not sound the alarm.
To set the alarm delay time:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]. Enter the required password and then select
[Ok].
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>]→[Alarm Delay].
Alarm delay is not applied to the following physiological alarms:

Apnea

ST alarms

Arrhythmia alarms

ECG Weak Signal

Resp Artifact

SpO2 Desat

No Pulse

Nellcor SpO2 over alarm limits

FiO2 Shortage

Measurements of noncontinuous parameters over alarm limits

HR over alarm limits

Anesthetic Mixture's MAC > 3
You can set [Apnea Delay] and [ST Alarm Delay] separately.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7-9
7.5.4 Setting SpO2 Technical Alarm Delay
You can set the [Tech. Alarm Delay] in the [Others] tab of the [Alarm Setup] menu. The options are [Off], [5 s], [10 s]
and [15 s]. The delay is effective to the following technical alarms: SpO2 Sensor Off, SpO2 Too Much Light, SpO2 Low
Signal and SpO2 Interference.
7.5.5 Setting Recording Length
You can change the length of the recorded waveforms. In the [Others] window of the [Alarm Setup] menu, select
[Recording Length] and then select [8 s], [16 s] or [32 s]:

[8 s]: 4 seconds respectively before and after the alarm or manual event trigger moment.

[16 s]: 8 seconds respectively before and after the alarm or manual event trigger moment.

[32 s]: 16 seconds respectively before and after the alarm or manual event trigger moment.
7.5.6 Entering CPB Mode (Cardiopulmonary Bypass Mode)
When performing CPB, you can put the monitor in CPB mode in order to reduce unnecessary alarms. The CPB mode is
activated only if you set the department to [OR]. To set the department to [OR]:
1.
Press the [Menu] hardkey on the monitor’s front panel to enter [Main Menu].
2.
Select [Maintenance >>]→[Manage Configuration >>]. Enter the required password and then select [Ok].
3.
Select [Change Department >>]→[OR].
In the CPB mode, all the physiological alarms, technical alarms and prompt alarms are switched off.
In the CPB mode, [CPB Mode] is displayed in the physiological alarm area with a red background color.
To enter CPB mode:
1.
Select the [CPB Mode] Quickkey or select [Enter CPB Mode] in the [Others] window of the [Alarm Setup] menu.
2.
Then select [Ok] in the pop-up dialog box.
7.6 Pausing Alarms
If you want to temporarily prevent alarms from sounding, you can pause alarms by pressing the [Alarm Pause] hardkey
on the monitor’s front panel. When alarms are paused:

No alarm lamps flash and no alarms are sounded.

No numerics or alarm limits flash.

No alarm messages are shown.

The remaining pause time is displayed in the physiological alarm area.

The alarms paused symbol
is displayed in the sound symbol area.
If the time interval of the monitor’s last shutdown from this start-up is greater than 2 minutes, the monitor enters into
the alarm paused status as soon as it is turned on. The alarm pause time is fixed to be 2 minutes.
When the alarm pause time expires, the alarm paused status is automatically cancelled and the alarm tone will sound.
You can also cancel the alarm paused status by pressing the [Alarm Pause] hardkey.
7-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
You can set the alarm pause time to [1 min], [2 min], [3 min], [5 min], [10 min], [15 min], or [Permanent]. The default
alarm pause time is 2 minutes.
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>]→[Alarm Pause Time] and then select the appropriate setting from the pop-up list.
7.7 Switching Off All Alarms
If [Alarm Pause Time] is set to [Permanent], the monitor enters into the alarm off status after the [Alarm Pause]
hardkey is pressed. During the alarm off status:

For physiological alarms, no alarm lamps flash and no alarms are sounded.

For physiological alarms, no numerics or alarm limits flash.

No physiological alarm messages are shown.

[Alarm Off] is displayed in the physiological alarm area with a red background.

For technical alarms, no alarms are sounded.

The
alarm off symbol is displayed in the alarm symbol area.
You can cancel the alarm off status by pressing the [Alarm Pause] hardkey.
WARNING

Pausing or switching off alarms may result in a hazard to the patient.
7.8 Resetting Alarms
By selecting the
QuickKey, you can reset the alarm system to acknowledge the on-going alarms and enable the
alarm system to respond to a subsequent alarm condition.
For physiological alarms, except the NIBP-related alarms, when the alarm system is reset:

The alarm sound is silenced.

A √ appears before the alarm message, indicating that the alarm is acknowledged.

The icon

The parameter numeric and alarm limits still flash.
appears in the alarm symbol area.
The indication of alarm lamp for the physiological alarm depends on the alarm light setting.

When [Alarm Light on Alarm Reset] is set to [On], the alarm lamp remains flashing.

When [Alarm Light on Alarm Reset] is set to [Off], the alarm lamp stops flashing.
To set [Alarm Light on Alarm Reset]:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7-11
3.
Select [Alarm Light on Alarm Reset], and then select [On] or [Off].
The default setting for [Alarm Light on Alarm Reset] is [On].
Technical alarms give different alarm indicators when the alarm system is reset:

For some technical alarms, including the NIBP-related alarms, a √ appears before the alarm message and
appears in the alarm symbol area, indicating that the alarm is acknowledged. The indication of the alarm lamp
depends on the alarm light setting.

Some technical alarms are changed to the prompt messages.

Some technical alarms are cleared. The monitor gives no alarm indications.
For details about the indications of technical alarms when the alarm system is reset, refer to appendix D.2 Technical
Alarm Messages.
7.9 Latching Alarms
The alarm latching setting for your monitor defines how the alarm indicators behave when you do not acknowledge
them. When alarms are set to non-latching, their alarm indications end when the alarm condition ends. If you switch
alarm latching on, all visual and audible alarm indications last until you acknowledge the alarms, except that the
measurement numeric and violated alarm limit stop flashing as soon as the initial alarm condition goes away.
To set alarms to latching or non-latching:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>].
3.
Select [Latching Alarms] and then select [High only], [Hi&Med], [All] or [Off].

If you select [High only], only high priority alarms are latched;

If you select [Hi&Med], both high priority alarms and medium priority alarms are latched;

If you select [All], all alarms are latched;

If you select [Off], the alarm latching is turned off.
NOTE

Changing of alarm priority may affect the latching status of corresponding alarms. Determine if you need to
reset the latching status for the specific alarm after changing its alarm priority.

When the alarm system is reset, the latched physiological alarms are cleared.
7.10 Testing Alarms
When the monitor starts up, a self-test is performed. In this case the alarm lamp is lit in yellow and red respectively, and
the system gives a beep. This indicates that the visible and audible alarm indicators are functioning correctly.
For further testing of individual measurement alarms, perform the measurement on yourself (for example, SpO2 or CO2)
or use a simulator. Then adjust alarm limits and check that appropriate alarm behavior is observed.
7-12
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7.11 Using Care Group Alarms
7.11.1 Care Group Auto Alarms
When a Care Group is set up on your monitor, a flashing symbol will appear beside the QuickKeys area if any monitor in
your Care Group, which is not currently viewed by your monitor, is alarming. The alarm symbol is shown as below.
When a monitor in the Care Group is disconnected, the flashing symbol is shown as below.
The department and bed label of the alarming monitor appear on the symbol. You can enter the View Other Patient
window by pressing this symbol.
7.11.2 Setting Care Group Alert Tone
When a monitor in the Care Group issues an alarm, your monitor prompts you by sounding an alert tone. To set the alert
tone:
1.
In the [Main Menu], select [Screen Setup >>]→[Screen Layout >>]→[Choose Screen].
2.
In the [Choose Screen] window, select [View Others Screen].
3.
In the view other patient window, select [Setup>>], and set [Alert Tone] to [Repeat], [Once] or [Off].
7.11.3 Resetting Care Group Alarms
You can reset the alarm of the currently viewed bed in the View Other Patient window. This function can be set in the
[Alarm Setup] menu from the [User Maintenance] menu only.
When [Reset Other Bed’s Alarms] is set to [On] in [Maintenance]→[User Maintenance]→[Alarm Setup], the [Alarm
Reset] button appears on the [View Other Patient] window. You can reset the alarm system for the selected monitor by
pressing the button. Refer to section 7.8 Resetting Alarms for details.
When [Reset Other Bed’s Alarms] is set to [Off], there is no button appearing on the [View Other Patient] window.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
7-13
FOR YOUR NOTES
7-14
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8 Monitoring ECG
8.1 Introduction
The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the monitor as a waveform
and a numeric. This section also tells you about ST monitoring and arrhythmia monitoring. ECG monitoring provides two
algorithms:

Mortara algorithm

Mindray algorithm (currently unavailable in the US and Canada)
The monitor incorporating Mortara algorithm is labelled with the Mortara logo.
8.2 Safety
WARNING

Use only ECG electrodes and cables specified by the manufacturer.

Make sure the conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for applied parts, including the
neutral electrode, should not contact any other conductive parts including earth.

Periodically inspect the electrode application site to ensure skin quality. If the skin quality changes, replace
the electrodes or change the application site.

Use defibrillation-proof ECG cables during defibrillation.

Do not touch the patient, or table, or instruments during defibrillation.

The neutral electrode of the HF surgical unit shall properly contact the patient. Otherwise, burns may result.

The equipment is not intended for direct cardiac application.
CAUTION

Interference from a non-grounded instrument near the patient and electrosurgery interference can cause
problems with the waveform.
NOTE

After defibrillation, the screen display recovers within 10 seconds if the correct electrodes are used and
applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for use.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-1
8.3 Preparing to Monitor ECG
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the Electrodes
To prepare the patient and place the electrodes:
1.
Prepare the patient’s skin. Proper skin preparation is necessary for good signal quality at the electrode site, as the
skin is a poor conductor of electricity. To properly prepare the skin, choose flat areas and then:

Shave hair from skin at chosen sites.

Gently rub skin surface at sites to remove dead skin cells.

Thoroughly cleanse the site with a mild soap and water solution. We do not recommend using ether or pure
alcohol, because this dries the skin and increases the resistance.

Dry the skin completely before applying the electrodes.
2.
Attach the clips or snaps to the electrodes before placing them.
3.
Place the electrodes on the patient.
4.
Attach the electrode cable to the patient cable and then plug the patient cable into the ECG connector.
8.3.2 Choosing AHA or IEC Lead Placement
To choose AHA or IEC lead placement:
1.
Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area to enter the [ECG Setup] menu.
2.
Select [Others]→[Lead Set] and then select [3-lead], [5-lead], or [Auto] according to the applied electrodes.
3.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
4.
Select [Others >>]→[ECG Standard] and then select [AHA] or [IEC] according to the hospital standard.
8.3.3 ECG Lead Placements
The electrode placement illustrations in this chapter adopt the AHA standard.
3-Leadwire Electrode Placement
Following is an electrode configuration when using 3 leadwires:

RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.

LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.

LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.
5-Leadwire Electrode Placement
Following is an electrode configuration when using 5 leadwires:

RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right
shoulder.
8-2

LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.

RL placement: on the right lower abdomen.

LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.

V placement: on the chest.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
The chest (V) electrode can be placed on one of the following positions:

V1 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the right sternal border.

V2 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the left sternal border.

V3 placement: midway between the V2 and V4 electrode positions.

V4 placement: on the fifth intercostal space at the left midclavicular line.

V5 placement: on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode
position.

V6 placement: on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position.

V3R-V6R placement: on the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the left.

VE placement: over the xiphoid process.

V7 placement: on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space.

V7R placement: on posterior chest at the right posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space.
Lead Placement for Surgical Patients
The surgical site should be taken into consideration when placing electrodes on a surgical patient. e.g. for open-chest
surgery, the chest electrodes can be placed on the lateral chest or back. To reduce artifacts and interference from
electrosurgical units, you can place the limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower abdomen and the chest
electrodes on the left side of the mid-chest. Do not place the electrodes on the upper arm. Otherwise, the ECG
waveform will be very small.
WARNING

When using electrosurgical units (ESU), patient leads should be placed in a position that is equal distance
from the Electrosurgery electrotome and the grounding plate to avoid burns to the patient. Never entangle
the ESU cable and the ECG cable together.

When using electrosurgical units (ESU), never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of the ESU,
as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.
8.3.4 Checking Paced Status
It is important to set the paced status correctly when you start monitoring ECG. The paced symbol
is displayed in
the ECG waveform area when the [Paced] status is set to [Yes]. The pace pulse markers “|” are shown on the ECG wave
when the patient has a paced signal. If [Paced] is set to [No] or the patient’s paced status is not selected, the symbol
will be shown in the ECG waveform area.
To change the paced status, you can select either:

the patient information area, or

[Main Menu] →[
Patient Setup] →[
Patient Demographics], or,

the ECG parameter window or waveform area→[
Others >>],
and then, select [Paced] from the pop-up menu and then select [Yes] or [No].
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-3
If you do not set the paced status, the monitor issues a prompt tone when pace pulse is detected. At the same time, the
paced symbol flashes and the message [Please confirm the pace of patient] appears in the ECG waveform area. Then,
please check and set the paced status of the patient.
WARNING

For paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [Yes]. If it is incorrectly set to [No], the monitor could mistake a
pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak. Do not rely entirely on rate meter
alarms when monitoring patients with pacemakers. Always keep these patients under close surveillance.

For non-paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [No].

The auto pacer recognition function is not applicable to pediatric and neonatal patients.

False low heart rate indicators or false Asystole calls may result with certain pacemakers because of
pacemaker artifact such as electrical overshoot of the pacemaker overlapping the true QRS complexes.
8.4 Understanding the ECG Display
Your display may be configured to look slightly different.
1
2
1.
Lead label of the displayed wave
2.
ECG gain
3.
ECG filter label
4.
Notch filter status
3
4
Besides, when a paced signal has been detected, the pace pulse marks “|” are shown on the ECG wave if the [Paced] has
been set to [Yes].
3
1
2
8-4
1.
Current heart rate alarm limits
2.
Current heart rate
3.
Heart beat symbol
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8.5 Changing ECG Settings
8.5.1 Accessing ECG Menus
By selecting the ECG parameter window or waveform area, you can access the [ECG Setup] menu.
8.5.2 Setting Pacemaker Rate (For Mortara ECG algorithm only)
Some pacemaker pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted as a QRS complex and
could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect some arrhythmias. You can set [Pacemaker Rate] to the pacemaker’s
rate in the [ECG Setup] menu. In this way, the monitor can calculate HR and detect arrhythmias more accurately. When
[Paced] is set to [No], the pacemaker rate cannot be set.
8.5.3 Choosing the Alarm Source
In most cases the HR and PR numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR and PR, the monitor
uses either HR or PR as its active alarm source. To change the alarm source, select [Alm Source] in the [ECG Setup] menu
and then select either:

[HR]: if you want the HR to be the alarm source for HR/PR.

[PR]: if you want the PR to be the alarm source for HR/PR.

[Auto]: If the [Alm Source] is set to [Auto], the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG measurements as the
alarm source whenever a valid heart rate is available. If the heart rate becomes unavailable, for example the ECG
module is turned off or becomes disconnected, the monitor will automatically switch to PR as the alarm source.
8.5.4 Changing ECG Wave Settings
In the [ECG Setup] menu:

You can select [ECG], [ECG1], or [ECG2] to select a lead to view. The waveform of selected lead should have the
following characteristics:


The QRS should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not be biphasic.

The QRS should be tall and narrow.

The P-waves and T-waves should be less than 0.2mV.
If the wave is too small or clipped, you can change its size by selecting an appropriate [Gain] setting. If you select
[Auto] from [Gain], the monitor will automatically adjust the size of the ECG waves. In normal screen, only the
selected ECG wave’s size is adjusted. In other screens, all ECG waves’ size is adjusted simultaneously.

You can change the wave sweep speed by selecting [Sweep] and then selecting the appropriate setting.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-5
8.5.5 Changing the ECG Filter Settings
The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed. To change the filter setting, select [Filter] from [ECG Setup]
and then select the appropriate setting.

[Monitor]: Use under normal measurement conditions.

[Diagnostic]: Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so that changes such as
R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segment are visible.

[Surgery]: Use when the signal is distorted by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency
interference usually results in large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency
interference usually leads to wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the surgery filter reduces artifacts
and interference from electrosurgical units. Under normal measurement conditions, selecting [Surgery] may
suppress the QRS complexes too much and then interfere with ECG analysis.

[ST]: Use when ST monitoring is applied.
CAUTION

The [Diagnostic] filter is recommended when monitoring a patient in an environment with slight
interference only.
8.5.6 Setting Pacemaker Rate (For Mortara only)
Some pacemaker pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted as a QRS complex and
could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect some arrhythmias. You can set [Pacemaker Rate] to the pacemaker’s
rate in the [ECG Setup] menu. In this way, the monitor can calculate HR and detect arrhythmias more accurately. When
[Paced] is set to [No], the pacemaker rate cannot be set.
8.5.7 Setting the ECG Lead Set
You can set the [Lead Set] by selecting [ECG Setup]→[Others>>]. You can set the [Lead Set] as [Auto] if the auto lead
detection function is available.
8.5.8 Choosing an ECG Display Screen
When monitoring with a 5-lead set, you can select the [Screens] Quickkey. In the [Choose Screen] window, choose the
screen type as:

[Normal Screen]: The ECG waveform area shows 2 ECG waveforms.

[ECG 7-Lead Full-Screen]: The whole waveform area shows 7 ECG waveforms only.

[ECG 7-Lead Half-Screen]: The upper half part of the whole waveform area displays 7 ECG waveforms.
When the screen type is set to [Normal Screen], cascaded ECG waveforms can be displayed. To cascade ECG waveforms:
8-6
1.
Select the [Screens] Quickkey→[Screen Setup].
2.
Select [ECG1 Casc.] in the second row. A cascaded waveform is displayed in two waveform positions.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8.5.9 Setting the Notch Filter
The notch filter removes the line frequency interference. Only when [Filter] is set to [Diagnostic], the [Notch Filter] is
adjustable.
To set the notch filter:
1.
Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area to enter its setup menu. Then select [Others >>].
2.
Set [Notch Filter] to:

[Strong]: when waveform interference is strong (such as spikes).

[Weak]: when waveform interference is weak.

[Off]: to turn the notch filter off.
Set notch frequency according to the electric power frequency of your country. To set notch filter frequency:
1.
When [Notch Filter] is turned on, select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the
required password.
2.
Select [Others >>]→[Notch Freq.] and then select [50Hz] or [60Hz] according to the power line frequency.
8.5.10 Changing the Pacer Reject Settings
Select [ECG Setup]→[Others>>]→[Pacer Reject], and then select [On] or [Off].
When [Paced] is set to [Yes]:

When [Pacer Reject] is switched on, the pace pulses are not counted as extra QRS complexes.

The pace pulse marks “|” are shown on the ECG wave when pace pulses are detected.
When [Paced] is set to [No], the pace markers are not shown on the ECG wave, and the options of [Pacer Reject] are
invalid.
8.5.11 Enabling Smart Lead Off
When the smart lead off function is set on and there is a “lead off” in the lead that has an ECG waveform in filter mode
and notch status, if another lead is available, this available lead automatically becomes that lead. The system will
re-calculate HR and analyze and detect arrhythmia. When the “lead off” condition is corrected, the leads are
automatically switched back.
To switch on/off the smart lead off function, select [Others >>] from the [ECG Setup] menu; select [Smart Lead Off] and
then select [On] or [Off] from the pop-up menu.
8.5.12 Setting the Alarm Level for ECG Lead Off Alarms
Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. You can set [ECGLeadOff Lev.] from the pop-up menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-7
8.5.13 Adjusting QRS Volume
QRS sounds are produced based on the alarm source.
To adjust the QRS volume, select [Others >>] from the [ECG Setup] menu; select [QRS Volume] from the pop-up menu
and select the appropriate setting. When a valid SpO2 measured value is available, the system adjusts the pitch tone of
QRS sound based on the SpO2 value.
8.5.14 About the Defibrillator Synchronization
A defibrillator synchronization pulse (100 ms, +5V) is outputted through the Multifunctional connector every time the
monitor detects an R-wave.
To use the defibrillator synchronization function:
1.
Connect the monitor and the defibrillator with a synchronization cable.
2.
Set [Filter] to [Diagnostic] on the monitor.
WARNING

Improper use of a defibrillator may cause injury to the patient. The user should determine whether to
perform defibrillation or not according to the patient’s condition.

After defibrillation is finished, select the filter mode as required.
8.6 About ST Monitoring

ST segment analysis is not intended for neonatal patients.

ST segment analysis calculates ST segment elevations and depressions for individual leads and then displays them
as numerics in the ST1 and ST2 areas.

A positive value indicates ST segment elevation; a negative value indicates ST segment depression.

Measurement unit of the ST segment: mV or mm. You can set the unit in the [Unit Setup] menu from the [User
Maintenance] menu.

Measurement range of the ST segment: -2.0 mV to +2.0 mV.
NOTE

The ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST segment data. The significance of the ST segment
changes need to be determined by a clinician.
8-8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8.6.1 Switching ST On and Off
To switch ST monitoring on or off:
1.
In the [ECG Setup] menu, select [ST Analysis >>].
2.
Select [ST Analysis] and then select [On] or [Off].
Reliable ST monitoring can hardly be ensured if:

You are unable to get a lead that is not noisy.

Arrhythmias such as atrial fib/flutter cause irregular baseline.

The patient is continuously ventricularly paced.

The patient has left bundle branch block.
In these cases, you may consider switching ST monitoring off.
8.6.2 Changing ST Filter Settings
ST-segment analysis can be carried out only when the filter mode is set to [Diagnostic] or [ST]. When ST-segment
analysis is switched on, [Filter] will automatically switch to [ST] if it is not [Diagnostic] or [ST]. When ST-segment
analysis is switched off, the filter mode automatically switches to previous manual setting.
However, if you switch [Filter] to [Monitor] or [Surgery], ST-segment analysis will turn off automatically. If you change
[Monitor] or [Surgery] to [Diagnostic] or [ST], ST-segment analysis remains off, you can turn it on manually.
8.6.3 Understanding the ST Display
8.6.3.1 ST Numerics
This example shows ST numerics with 5-lead ECG. Your monitor screen may look slightly different from the illustration.
8.6.3.2 ST Segment
ST segment shows a QRS complex segment for each measured ST lead. The current ST segment is drawn in the same
color as the ECG wave, usually green, superimposed over the stored reference segment, drawn in a different color. The
information is updated once every ten seconds.
To display the ST segment on normal screen:
1.
Enter the [ST Analysis] menu. Set [ST Analysis] to [On].
2.
Enter the [Screen Setup] window from the [Screens] menu. Set [ST Segment] to be displayed.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-9
Select the ST parameter window or ST segment area to enter the [ST Analysis] menu.
8.6.4 Saving the Current ST Segment as Reference
Select [Save Ref.] in the [ST Analysis] menu to save the current segment as a reference. Up to 20 reference segment
groups can be saved.
NOTE

If the memory is full and you do not delete a group before saving a new one, the earliest saved group is
deleted automatically.
8.6.5 Changing the Reference Segment
Select the
and
arrow keys beside the [Change Ref.] to switch between different reference segment groups.
8.6.6 Deleting a Reference Segment
To delete the current ST reference segment, select [Delete Ref.] in the [ST Analysis] menu and then select [Ok] in the
pop-up.
8.6.7 Recording the ST Segment
To record the current ST segment and reference segment, select [Record] in the [ST Analysis] menu.
8.6.8 Changing the ST Alarm Limits
High and low ST alarm limits can be set individually for each ECG lead. Alarm limits can also be set separately for
single-lead and multi-lead ST monitoring. You can select [ST Alarm Setup >>] from [ST Analysis] menu and then
change ST alarm settings for each lead.
8-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8.6.9 Setting the ST Alarm Delay Time
To set the ST alarm delay time,
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]. Enter the required password and then select
[OK].
2.
Select [Alarm Setup >>]→[ST Alarm Delay].
8.6.10 Adjusting ST Measurement Points
As shown in the figure below, the ST measured for each beat complex is the vertical difference between two
measurement points with the R-wave peak as the baseline for the measurement.
R-wave peak
J Point
P point
T
Q point
ISO electric point
Difference=ST value
ST measurement point
The ISO and ST points need to be adjusted when you start monitoring and if the patient’s heart rate or ECG morphology
changes significantly. Exceptional QRS complexes are not considered for ST-segment analysis.
WARNING

Always make sure that the ST measurement points are appropriate for your patient.
To adjust the ST measurement points:
1.
In the [ST Analysis] menu, select [Adjust ST Point >>]. In the [Adjust ST Point] window, three vertical lines
represent the ISO, J and ST point positions respectively.
2.
Use the arrows
and
besides the [View Leads] button to select an ECG lead with obvious J point and R
wave.
3.
Sdjust the position of [ISO], [J] or [ST Point]:

The ISO-point (isoelectric) position is given relative to the R-wave peak. Position the ISO-point in the middle of
the flattest part of the baseline (between the P and Q waves).

The J-point position is given relative to the R-wave peak and helps locating the ST-point. Position the J-point at
the end of the QRS complex and the beginning of the ST segment.

The ST-point is positioned a fixed distance from the J-point. Move the J-point to position the ST-point at the
midpoint of the ST segment. Position the ST-point relative to the J-point at either [J+60/80ms], [J+40ms],
[J+60ms] or [J+80ms]. When [J+60/80ms] is selected, the ST-point will be positioned 80 ms (heart rate 120
bpm or less) or 60 ms (heart rate more than 120 bpm) from the J-point.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-11
NOTE

Only Mindray ECG algorithm (currently unavailable in the US and Canada) has the function of automatic J
point detection.
8.7 About Arrhythmia Monitoring
Arrhythmia analysis provides information about your patient’s condition, including heart rate, PVC rate, rhythm and
ectopics.
WARNING

Arrhythmia analysis program is intended to detect ventricular arrhythmias. It is not designed to detect atrial
or supraventricular arrhythmias. It may incorrectly identify the presence or absence of an arrhythmia.
Therefore, a physician must analyze the arrhythmia information with other clinical findings.

The arrhythmia detection is not intended for neonatal patients.

Heart-rate reading may be affected by cardiac arrhythmias. Do not rely entirely on rate meter alarms when
monitoring patients with arrhythmia. Always keep these patients under close surveillance.
8.7.1 Understanding the Arrhythmia Events
Mortara ECG algorithm
Arrhythmia Message
Description
Category
Asystole
No QRS complex detected within the set time threshold (in absence of
Lethal
ventricular fibrillation or chaotic signals).
arrhythmia
Vfib
Ventricular fibrillation occurs and persists for 6 seconds.
Vtac
Ventricular HR is greater or equal to the preset threshold and the number of
consecutive PVCs is greater than the preset threshold.
PVCs
PVCs/min exceeds high limit
Nonlethal
PNP
No pace pulse detected for (60*1000/pace rate +90) milliseconds following a QRS
arrhythmia
complex or a pacer pulse (for paced patients only).
PNC
No QRS complex detected for 300 milliseconds following a pace pulse (for paced
patients only).
Multif. PVC
More than 2 PVCs of different forms occur in the predefined search window
(3-31).
Couplet
Paired PVCs are detected.
VT > 2
Ventricular HR is greater than or equal to the preset threshold and the number of
PVCs is greater than or equal to 3 but less than the preset threshold.
Vent. Rhythm
Ventricular HR is less than the preset threshold and the number of PVCs is greater
than or equal to 3.
Bigeminy
A dominant rhythm of N, V,N, V, N, V.
Trigeminy
A dominant rhythm of N, N, V,N, N, V, N, N, V.
R on T
R on T is detected.
Irr. Rhythm
Consistently irregular rhythm
8-12
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Missed Beats
No beat detected for 1.75x average R-R interval for HR <120, or
No beat for 1 second with HR >120 (for non-paced patients only), or
No beat detected for more than the set pause threshold.
Brady
The HR is less than the set bradycardia low limit.
Tachy
The HR is greater than the set tachycardia high limit.
Mindray ECG algorithm (currently unavailable in the US and Canada)
Arrhythmia message
Asystole
Vfib/Vtac
Vtac
Vent. Brady
Description
No QRS detected within the set time threshold in absence of ventricular
fibrillation or chaotic signal.
A fibrillatory wave for 6 consecutive seconds.
A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs and a HR > the V-Tac HR limit.
The consecutive PVCs ≥ Vtac PVCs limit, and the HR ≥ the Vtac rate limit.
The consecutive PVCs ≥ the Vbrd threshold and the ventricular HR < the Vbrd
The heart rate is equal to or greater than the extreme tachycardia limit.
Extreme Brady
The heart rate is equal to or less than the extreme bradycardia limit.
PVCs
PVCs/min exceeds high limit
Pacer not capture
arrhythmia
No pace pulse detected for 1.75 x average R-to-R intervals following a QRS
complex (for paced patients only).
No QRS complex detected for 300 milliseconds following a pace pulse (for
paced patients only).
PVC
One PVC detected in normal heartbeats.
Couplet
Paired PVCs detected in normal heartbeats.
VT > 2
More than 2 consecutive PVCs within the last minute.
Bigeminy
A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V, N, V.
Trigeminy
A dominant rhythm of N, N, V,N, N, V, N, N, V.
R on T
R on T detected in normal heartbeats.
No beat detected for 1.75 x average R-R interval for HR <120, or No beat for 1
Missed Beats
Lethal
Rate threshold.
Extreme Tachy
Pacer not paced
Category
second with HR > 120 (for non-paced patients only), or No beat detected for
Nonlethal
arrhythmia
more than the set pause threshold.
Brady
The average heart rate is equal to or less than the bradycardia limit.
Tachy
The average heart rate is equal to or greater than the tachycardia limit.
Vent. Rhythm
Multif. PVC
Nonsus. Vtac
The consecutive PVCs ≥ the Vbrd PVCs limit, and the HR ≥ Vbrd Rate limit but <
the Vtac Rate limit.
Multiform PVCs detected in Multif. PVC's Window (which is adjustable).
The consecutive PVCs < the Vtac PVCs limit but > 2, and HR ≥ the Vtac Rate
limit.
Pause
No QRS detected within the set time threshold of pause.
Irr. Rhythm
Consistently irregular rhythm.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-13
8.7.2 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings
To change arrhythmia alarm settings, select the ECG parameter area or waveform area →[ECG Setup]→ [Arrh.
Analysis >>]. In the pop-up menu, you can set the [Alm Lev] to [High], [Med], [Low] or [Message], or switch on lethal
arrhythmia analysis alarms only or switch on/off all arrhythmia analysis alarms. In the [Alarm Setup] menu from the
[User Maintenance] menu, you can enable/disable turning off lethal arrhythmia analysis alarms.
WARNING

If you switch off all arrhythmia analysis alarms, the monitor cannot give any arrhythmia analysis alarm.
Always keep the patient under close surveillance.

The priority of lethal arrhythmia alarms is always high. It is unchangeable.
8.7.3 Changing Arrhythmia Threshold Settings
Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area→[Arrh. Analysis >>]→[Arrh. Threshold], and you can then
change threshold settings for some arrhythmia alarms. When an arrhythmia violates its threshold, an alarm will be
triggered. The asystole delay time relates to ECG relearning. When HR is less than 30 bpm, it is recommended to set the
asystole delay time to 10 seconds.
Mortara ECG algorithm
Arrh. event
Range
Default
Step
Unit
PVCs High
1 to 100
10
1
/min
Asys. Delay
2 to 10
5
1
s
Vtac Rate
100 to 200
130
5
bpm
Vtac PVC
3 to 12
6
1
beats
Multif. PVC
3 to 31
15
1
beats
Adult: 100 to 300
Adult: 100
Pediatric: 160 to 300
Pediatric: 160
5
bpm
Adult: 15 to 60
Adult: 60
Pediatric: 15 to 80
Pediatric: 80
5
bpm
Tachy High
Brady Low
Mindray ECG algorithm (currently unavailable in the US and Canada)
Arrh. event
Range
Default
Step
Unit
PVCs High
1 to 100
10
1
/min
Asys. Delay
3 to 10
5
1
s
Tachy High
60 to 300
5
bpm
Brady Low
15 to 120
5
bpm
Extreme Tachy
120 to 300
5
bpm
Extreme Brady
15 to 60
5
bpm
8-14
Adult: 120
Pediatric: 160
Adult: 50
Pediatric: 75
Adult: 160
Pediatric: 180
Adult: 35
Pediatric: 50
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Arrh. event
Range
Default
Step
Unit
Multif. PVC's Window
3 to 31
15
1
/min
Vtac Rate
100 to 200
Adult, pediatric: 130
5
bpm
Vtac PVCs
3 to 99
6
1
/min
Pause Time
1.5, 2.0,2.5
2
/
s
Vbrd PVCs
3 to 99
5
1
/min
Vbrd Rate
15 to 60
40
5
bpm
8.7.4 Setting the Extended Arrhythmia (For Mindray ECG Algorithm only, currently
unavailable in the US and Canada)
The following arrhythmia events are defined as extended arrhythmia:

Extreme Tachy

Extreme Brady

Vent. Brady

Nonsus. Vtac

Multif. PVC

Irr. Rhythm

Pause
You can select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→select
[Alarm Setup >>], and set [Extended Arrh.] to [Enable] or [Disable]. When [Extended Arrh.] is set to [Disable], the
monitor does not analysis the extended arrhythmia events and corresponding alarms are not given.
CAUTION

Set [Extended Arrh.] to [Disable] when the monitor is connected to the CMS of version prior to 06.01.00.
Failure to do so may cause the CMS to fail to display extended arrhythmia related alarms normally when
extended arrhythmia occurs.
8.7.5 Reviewing Arrhythmia Events
Please refer to section 19.4 Reviewing Events.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-15
8.8 ECG Relearning
8.8.1 Initiating an ECG Relearning Manually
During ECG monitoring, you may need to initiate an ECG relearning when the patient’s ECG template changes
dramatically. A change in the ECG template could result in:

Incorrect arrhythmia alarms

Loss of ST measurement, and/or

Inaccurate heart rate
ECG relearning allows the monitor to learn the new ECG template to correct arrhythmia alarms and HR value, and restore
ST measurements. To initiate relearning manually, select the ECG parameter window or waveform area → [Relearn].
When the monitor is learning, the message [ECG Learning] is displayed in the technical alarm area.
WARNING

Initiate ECG relearning only during periods of normal rhythm and when the ECG signal is relatively
noise-free. If ECG learning takes place during ventricular rhythm, the ectopics may be incorrectly learned as
the normal QRS complex. This may result in missed detection of subsequent events of V-Tach and V-Fib.
8.8.2 Automatic ECG Relearning
ECG relearning is initiated automatically whenever:

The ECG lead or lead label is changed.

The ECG lead is re-connected.

A new patient is admitted.

After the ECG calibration is completed, and [Stop Calibrating ECG] is selected.

A switch happens between the options of screen type during 5 ECG monitoring.

The paced status of the patient is changed.
8.9 Troubleshooting
This section lists the problems that might occur. If you encounter the problems when using the equipment or
accessories, check the table below before requesting for services. If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.
CAUTION

Never try to disassemble the equipment or supplied accessories. There are no internal user-serviceable
parts.
Symptoms
Possible Cause
Correction Action
Noisy ECG traces
Loose or dry electrodes
Apply fresh and moist electrodes.
8-16
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Symptoms
Excessive Electro-surgical
Possible Cause
Correction Action
Defective electrode wires
Replace wires if necessary.
Patient cable or leads are routed too
Move the patient cable or leads away from the
close to other electrical devices
electrical device.
Wrong ECG cable used
Use ESU-proof ECG cables. For details, refer to
section 27.1 ECG Accessories.
Interference
Muscle Noise
Inadequate skin preparation prior to
Repeat skin preparation as described in section
application of electrode, tremors,
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the
tense subject, and/or poor electrode
Electrodes and re-place the electrodes.
placement
Apply fresh, moist electrodes.
Avoid muscular areas.
Intermittent Signal
Connections not tight and/or properly
Check that the cables are properly connected.
secured
Electrodes dry or loose
Repeat skin preparation as described in section
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the
Electrodes and apply fresh and moist electrodes.
Excessive alarms: heart rate,
Cable or lead wires damaged
Change cable and lead wires.
Electrodes dry
Repeat skin preparation as described in section
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the
lead fault
Electrodes and apply fresh, moist electrodes.
Low Amplitude ECG Signal
Excessive patient movement or
Reposition the electrodes.
muscle tremor
Replace fresh and moist electrodes if necessary.
Gain set too low
Set the gain as required. For details, refer to section
8.5.4 Changing ECG Wave Settings.
Electrodes dry / old
Apply fresh and moist electrodes.
Skin improperly prepared
Repeat skin preparation as described in section
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the
Electrodes.
This could be the patient’s normal QRS
Verify with another well-functioning monitor.
complex
No ECG Waveform
Electrode could be positioned over a
Move ECG patches away from the bone or muscle
bone or muscle mass
mass.
Gain set too low
Set the gain as required. For details, refer to section
8.5.4 Changing ECG Wave Settings.
Base Line Wander
Lead wires and patient cable not fully
Check that the leadwires and patient cables are
or properly inserted
properly connected.
Cable or lead wires damaged
Change cable and lead wires.
Patient moving excessively
Secure leadwires and cable to patient.
Electrodes dry or loose
Repeat skin preparation as described in section
8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the
Electrodes and apply fresh and moist electrodes.
ECG Filter set to ST or Diagnostic
Set ECG Filter to “Monitor” mode.
mode
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
8-17
FOR YOUR NOTES
.
8-18
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
9 Monitoring Respiration (Resp)
9.1 Introduction
Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax. When the patient is breathing or ventilated, the volume of air
changes in the lungs, resulting in impedance changes between the electrodes. Respiration rate (RR) is calculated from
these impedance changes, and a respiration waveform appears on the monitor screen.
9.2 Safety Information
WARNING

When monitoring the patient’s respiration, do not use ESU-proof ECG cables.

If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual detection mode, it may not be
possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you set the detection level too low, the monitor is more likely to
detect cardiac activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as respiratory activity in the case of apnea.

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no breath
is detected when a pre-configured time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it cannot be
used for diagnostic purpose.

If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated Immunity 3V/m), field
strengths above 1V/m may cause erroneous measurements at various frequencies. Therefore it is
recommended to avoid the use of electrically radiating equipment in close proximity to the respiration
measurement unit.
9.3 Understanding the Resp Display
1
1.
Gain
2.
Resp lead label
3.
Respiration rate
4.
RR source
2
3
4
By selecting the waveform area or parameter area, you can enter the [Resp Setup] menu.
NOTE

Respiration monitoring is not for use on the patients who are very active, as this will cause false alarms.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
9-1
9.4 Placing Resp Electrodes
As the skin is a poor conductor of electricity, preparing the skin is necessary for a good respiration signal. You can refer to
the ECG section for how to prepare the skin. For details, refer to section 8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the
Electrodes.
As the respiration measurement adopts the standard ECG electrode placement, you can use different ECG cables (3-lead,
or 5-lead). Since the respiration signal is measured between two ECG electrodes, if a standard ECG electrode placement
is applied, the two electrodes should be RA and LA of ECG Lead I, or RA and LL of ECG Lead II.
NOTE

To optimize the respiration waveform, place the RA and LA electrodes horizontally when monitoring
respiration with ECG Lead I; place the RA and LL electrodes diagonally when monitoring respiration with
ECG Lead II.
Lead I
Lead II
9.4.1 Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp
If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to optimize the placement of the two
electrodes between which Resp will be measured. Repositioning ECG electrodes from standard positions results in
changes in the ECG waveform and may influence ST and arrhythmia interpretation.
9.4.2 Cardiac Overlay
Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the Resp electrodes pick up
impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrodes placement can help to reduce cardiac
overlay: avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the respiratory electrodes. This is
particularly important for neonates.
9.4.3 Abdominal Breathing
Some patients with restricted movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may need to place the left leg
electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal expansion to optimise the respiratory wave.
9-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
9.4.4 Lateral Chest Expansion
In clinical applications, some patients (especially neonates) expand their chests laterally, causing a negative intrathoracic
pressure. In these cases, it is better to place the two respiration electrodes in the right midaxillary and the left lateral
chest areas at the patient’s maximum point of the breathing movement to optimise the respiratory waveform.
9.5 Choosing the Respiration Lead
In the [Resp Setup] menu, set [Resp Lead] to [I], [II] or [Auto].
9.6 Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay
The apnea alarm is a high-level alarm used to detect apneas. You can set the apnea alarm delay time after which the
monitor alarms if the patient stops breathing.
In the [Resp Setup] menu, select [Apnea Delay] and then select the appropriate setting. The [Apnea Delay] of Resp,
CO2, and AG module keeps consistent with each other.
9.7 Changing Resp Detection Mode
In the [Resp Setup] menu, select [Detection Mode] and then select [Auto] or [Manual].

In auto detection mode, the monitor adjusts the detection level automatically, depending on the wave height and
the presence of cardiac artifact. Note that in auto detection mode, the detection level (a dotted line) is not
displayed on the waveform.
Use auto detection mode for situations where:


The respiration rate is not close to the heart rate.

Breathing is spontaneous, with or without continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP).

Patients are ventilated, except patients with intermittent mandatory ventilation (IMV).
In manual detection mode, you adjust the dotted detection level line to the desired level by selecting [Upper Line]
or [Lower Line] and then selecting
or
beside them. Once set, the detection level will not adapt
automatically to different respiration depths. It is important to remember that if the depth of breathing changes,
you may need to change the detection level.
Use manual detection mode for situations where:

The respiration rate and the heart rate are close.

Patients have intermittent mandatory ventilation.

Respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.
In Auto Detection Mode, if you are monitoring Resp and ECG is switched off, the monitor cannot compare the ECG and
Resp rates to detect cardiac overlay. The respiration detection level is automatically set higher to prevent the detection
of cardiac overlay as respiration.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
9-3
In Manual Detection Mode, cardiac overlay can in certain situations trigger the respiration counter. This may lead to a
false indication of a high respiration or an undetected apnea condition. If you suspect that cardiac overlay is being
registered as breathing activity, raise the detection level above the zone of cardiac overlay. If the Resp wave is so small
that raising the detection level is not possible, you may need to optimize the electrode placement as described in
section 9.4.4 Lateral Chest Expansion.
9.8 Changing Resp Wave Settings
WARNING

When monitoring in manual detection mode, make sure to check the respiration detection level after you
have increased or decreased the size of the respiration wave.
In the [Resp Setup] menu, you can:

Select [Gain] and then select an appropriate setting. The bigger the gain is, the larger the wave amplitude is.

Select [Sweep] and then select an appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.
9.9 Setting Respiration Rate Source
To set RR source:
1.
Enter the [Resp Setup] menu.
2.
Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.
The dropdown list displays the currently available RR source. When you select [Auto], the system will automatically
select the RR source according to the priority. When the current RR source does not have valid measurement, the system
will automatically switch the [RR Source] to [Auto]. RR source switches back to impedance respiration if you press the
[Alarm Reset] key during an apnea alarm.
The priority of RR source is (from high to low): CO2 measurement, and impedance respiration measurement. The [RR
Source] settings of Resp, CO2, and AG module are linked.
The RR source options and description are shown in the table below.
Option
Description
Auto
RR source is automatically selected according to the priority.
CO2
RR source is from CO2 measurement.
ECG
RR source is from impedance respiration measurement.
9.10 Setting Alarm Properties
Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [Resp Setup] menu. In the pop-up menu, you can set alarm properties for this
parameter.
9-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
10 Monitoring PR
10.1 Introduction
The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations that result from the mechanical activity of the heart. You can display a
pulse from any measured SpO2 or any arterial pressure (see chapter 14 Monitoring IBP). The displayed pulse numeric is
color-coded to match its source.
1
2
1.
PR: detected beats per minute.
2.
PR Source
NOTE

A functional tester or SpO2 simulator can be used to determine pulse rate accuracy.
10.2 Setting the PR Source
The current pulse source is displayed in the PR parameter area. The pulse rate chosen as pulse source:

is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select PR as the active alarm source;

is stored in the monitor’s database and reviewed in the graphic/tabular trends; in trend graphs, as the PR curve is in
the same color with the PR source , it is unlikely to distinguish the PR source;

is sent via the network to the CMS, if available.
To set which pulse rate as PR source:
1.
Enter the [SpO2 Setup] menu.
2.
Select [PR Source] and then select a label or [Auto] from the pop-up menu.
The pop-up menu displays the currently available PR sources from top to bottom by priority. When you select [Auto], the
system will automatically select the first option as the PR source from the pop-up menu. When the current PR source is
unavailable, the system will automatically switch [PR Source] to [Auto]. When you select [IBP], the system will
automatically select the first pressure label as the PR source from the pop-up menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
10-1
10.3 Selecting the Active Alarm Source
In most cases the HR and pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR and PR, the monitor
uses either HR or PR as its active alarm source. To change the alarm source, select [Alm Source] in the [ECG Setup] or
[SpO2 Setup] menu and then select either:

[HR]: The monitor will use the HR as the alarm source for HR/pulse.

[PR]: The monitor will use the PR as the alarm source for HR/pulse.

[Auto]: If the [Alm Source] is set to [Auto], the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG measurement as the
alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and a valid heart rate is available. If the heart rate
becomes unavailable, for example if leads becomes disconnected, and a pulse source is switch on and available, the
monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source. When the Leads Off condition is corrected, the
monitor will automatically switch back to the heart rate as the alarm source.
10.4 QRS Tone
When PR is used as the alarm source, the PR source will be used as a source for the QRS tone. You can change the QRS
volume by adjusting [Beat Vol] in the [SpO2 Setup] menu. When a valid SpO2 value exists, the system will adjust the
pitch tone of QRS volume according to the SpO2 value.
10-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11 Monitoring SpO
2
11.1 Introduction
SpO2 monitoring is a non-invasive technique used to measure the amount of oxygenated haemoglobin and pulse rate
by measuring the absorption of selected wavelengths of light. The light generated in the probe passes through the
tissue and is converted into electrical signals by the photodetector in the probe. The SpO2 module processes the
electrical signal and displays a waveform and digital values for SpO2 and pulse rate.
This device is calibrated to display functional oxygen saturation. It provides the following measurements:
1
2
3
4
1.
Pleth waveform (Pleth): visual indication of patient’s pulse. The waveform is not normalized.
2.
Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2): percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the sum of
5
oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin.
3.
Perfusion index (PI): gives the numerical value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial
pulsation. PI is an indicator of the pulsatile strength. You can also use it to assess the quality of SpO2 measurement.

Above 1 is optimal

Between 0.3 and 1 is acceptable

Below 0.3 indicates low perfusion;. When PI is below 0.3, a question mark (?) is displayed to the right of the
SpO2 value, indicating that the SpO2 value may be inaccurate. R eposition the SpO2 sensor or find a better site.
If low perfusion persists, choose another method to measure oxygen saturation if possible.
PI is available for Masimo SpO2 module. For Masimo SpO2 module, PI value can be displayed under the PR value in
larger characters if [PI Zoom] is enabled.
4.
Perfusion indicator: the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial pulsation.
5.
Pulse rate (derived from the pleth wave): detected pulsations per minute.
NOTE

A functional tester or SpO2 simulator cannot be used to assess the accuracy of a SpO2 module or a SpO2
sensor.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11-1
11.2 Safety
WARNING

Use only SpO2 sensors specified in this manual. Follow the SpO2 sensor’s instructions for use and adhere to
all warnings and cautions.

When a trend toward patient deoxygenation is indicated, blood samples should be analyzed by a laboratory
co-oximeter to completely understand the patient’s condition.

The equipment is not intended for use in an MRI environment.

Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes in skin characteristics, such
as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns. Inspect the sensor site every two hours and move the sensor if
the skin quality changes. Change the application site every four hours. For neonates, or patients with poor
peripheral blood circulation or sensitive skin, inspect the sensor site more frequently.
11.3 Identifying SpO2 Modules
To identify which SpO2 module is incorporated into your monitor, see the color of the SpO2 connector and the company
logo located at the monitor. The color of the cable connector matches the company as shown below:

Masimo SpO2 module: a purple connector with a logo of Masimo SET.

Nellcor SpO2 module: a grey connector with a logo of Nellcor.
The connectors for these three SpO2 sensors are mutually exclusive.
11.4 Applying the Sensor
To apply the sensor:
1.
Select an appropriate sensor according to the module type, patient category and weight.
2.
Remove colored nail polish from the application site.
3.
Apply the sensor to the patient.
4.
Select an appropriate adapter cable according to the connector type and plug this cable into the SpO2 connector.
5.
Connect the sensor cable to the adapter cable.
WARNING

If the sensor is too tight because the application site is too large or becomes too large due to edema,
excessive pressure for prolonged periods may result in venous congestion distal from the application site,
leading to interstitial edema and tissue ischemia.
11-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11.5 Changing SpO2 Settings
11.5.1 Accessing SpO2 Menus
By selecting the SpO2 parameter window or waveform area, you can access the [SpO2 Setup] menu.
11.5.2 Adjusting the Desat Alarm
The desat alarm is a high level alarm notifying you of potentially life threatening drops in oxygen saturation. Select
[Alarm Setup >>] from the [SpO2 Setup] menu. From the pop-up menu, you can set low alarm limit, alarm switch, and
alarm recording for [Desat]. When the SpO2 value is below the desat alarm limit and desat alarm switch is set on, the
message [SpO2 Desat] is displayed.
11.5.3 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity
For Masimo SpO2 module, you can set [Sensitivity] to [Normal] or [Maximum] in the [SpO2 Setup] menu. When the
[Sensitivity] is set to [Maximum], the monitor is more sensitive to minor signals. When monitoring critically ill patients
whose pulsations are very weak, it is strongly recommended that the sensitivity is set to [Maximum]. When monitoring
neonatal or non-critically ill patients who tend to move a lot, noise or invalid signals may be caused. In this case, it is
recommended that the sensitivity is set to [Normal] so that the interference caused by motion can be filtered and
therefore the measurement stability can be ensured.
11.5.4 Changing Averaging Time
The SpO2 value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The shorter the
averaging time is, the quicker the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation level. Contrarily, the
longer the averaging time is, the slower the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation level, but
the measurement accuracy will be improved. For critically ill patients, selecting shorter averaging time will help
understanding the patient’s state.
To set the averaging time for Masimo SpO2 module:
,1.
Select [Averaging] in the [SpO2 Setup] menu.
2.
Then select [2-4 s], [4-6 s], [8 s], [10 s], [12 s], [14 s] or [16 s].
11.5.5 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously
When monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the same limb simultaneously, you can switch [NIBP Simul] on in the [SpO2 Setup]
menu to lock the SpO2 alarm status until the NIBP measurement ends. If you switch [NIBP Simul] off, low perfusion
caused by NIBP measurement may lead to inaccurate SpO2 readings and therefore cause false physiological alarms.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11-3
11.5.6 Sat-Seconds Alarm Management
With traditional alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set for monitoring oxygen saturation. During
monitoring, as soon as an alarm limit is violated, an audible alarm immediately sounds. When the patient % SpO2
fluctuates near an alarm limit, the alarm sounds each time the limit is violated. Such frequent alarms can be distracting.
Nellcor’s Sat-Seconds alarm management technique is used to reduce these nuisance alarms.
The Sat-Seconds feature is available with the Nellcor SpO2 module to decrease the likelihood of false alarms caused by
motion artifacts. To set the Sat-Seconds limit, select [Sat-Seconds] in the [SpO2 Setup] menu and then select the
appropriate setting.
With Sat-Seconds alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set in the same way as traditional alarm
management. A Sat-Seconds limit is also set. The Sat-Seconds limit controls the amount of time that SpO2 saturation may
be outside the set limits before an alarm sounds. The method of calculation is as follows: the number of percentage
points that the SpO2 saturation falls outside the alarm limit is multiplied by the number of seconds that it remains
outside the limit. This can be stated as the equation:
Sat-Seconds= Points × Seconds
Only when the Sat-Seconds limit is reached, the monitor gives a Sat-Seconds alarm. For example, the figure below
demonstrates the alarm response time with a Sat-Seconds limit set at 50 and a low SpO2 limit set at 90%. In this example,
the patient % SpO2 drops to 88% (2 points) and remains there for 2 seconds. Then it drops to 86% (4 points) for 3 seconds,
and then to 84% (6 points) for 6 seconds. The resulting Sat-Seconds are:
% SpO2
Seconds
Sat-Seconds
2×
2=
4
4×
3=
12
6×
6=
36
Total Sat-Seconds=
52
After approximately 10.9 seconds, a Sat-Second alarm would sound, because the limit of 50 Sat-Seconds would have
been exceeded.
SpO2
Seconds
11-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Saturation levels may fluctuate rather than remaining steady for a period of several seconds. Often, the patient % SpO2
may fluctuate above and below an alarm limit, re-entering the non-alarm range several times. During such fluctuation,
the monitor integrates the number of %SpO2 points, both positive and negative, until either the Sat-Seconds limit is
reached, or the patient %SpO2 re-enters the non-alarm range and remains there.
NOTE

The “SpO2 Too Low” or “SpO2 Too High” alarm is presented in the case that SpO2 value violates the alarm
limits for 3 times within one minute even if the setting of Sat-Seconds is not reached.
11.5.7 Changing the Speed of the Pleth Wave
In the [SpO2 Setup] menu, select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the waveform sweeps, the
wider the waveform is.
11.5.8 Zooming PI Value
For Masimo SpO2 module, you can display PI value in larger characters for better view. To zoom in the display of PI value,
set [PI Zoom] to [Yes] from the [SpO2 Setup] menu.
11.5.9 Setting the Alarm Level for SpO2 Sensor Off Alarm
Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. You can set the [SpO2SensorOff Lev.] in the pop-up
menu.
11.5.10 Setting the SpO2 Tone Mode
Select [Others >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the pop-up menu, you can set [SpO2 Tone] as [Mode 1] or
[Mode 2].
WARNING

The same SpO2 tone mode shall be used for the same monitors in a single area.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11-5
11.6 Measurement Limitations
If you doubt the SpO2 measurement, check the patient’s vital signs first. Then check the monitor and SpO2 sensor. The
following factors may influence the accuracy of measurement:

Ambient light

Physical movement (patient and imposed motion)

Diagnostic testing

Low perfusion

Electromagnetic interference, such as MRI environment

Electrosurgical units

Dysfunctional haemoglobin, such as carboxyhemoglobin (COHb)and methemoglobin (MetHb)

Presence of certain dyes, such as methylene and indigo carmine

Inappropriate positioning of the SpO2 sensor, or use of incorrect SpO2 sensor.

Drop of arterial blood flow to immeaurable level caused by shock, anemia, low temperature or vasoconstrictor.
11.7 Masimo Information

Masimo Patents
This device is covered under one or more the following U.S.A. patents: 5,758,644, 6,011,986, 6,699,194, 7,215,986,
7,254,433, 7,530,955 and other applicable patents listed at: www.masimo.com/patents.htm.

No Implied License
Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized sensors or cables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of one or
more of the patents relating to this device.
11-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11.8 Nellcor Information

Nellcor Patents
This device may be covered by one or more of the following US patents and foreign equivalents: 5,485,847, 5,676,141,
5,743,263, 6,035,223, 6,226,539, 6,411,833, 6,463,310, 6,591,123, 6,708,049, 7,016,715, 7,039,538, 7,120,479, 7,120,480,
7,142,142, 7,162,288, 7,190,985, 7,194,293, 7,209,774, 7,212,847, 7,400,919.

No Implied License
Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized replacement parts which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of one or
more of the patents relating to this device.
11.9 Troubleshooting
This section lists the problems that might occur. If you encounter the problems when using the equipment or
accessories, check the table below before requesting for services. If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.
NOTE

Never try to disassemble the equipment or supplied accessories. There are no internal user-serviceable
parts.
Symptoms
Possible Cause
Dashes “- -” display in place of
Measurement is invalid.
numerics.
Do not see SpO2 parameter
Correction Action
Check that the sensor is properly applied. Change
the application site if necessary.
Parameter not configured to display.
Switch the SpO2 monitoring function on as
described in section 3.12.1 Switching the
tiles in display.
Parameters On/Off.
Unable to obtain SpO2 reading
Patient has poor perfusion
Switch limbs/notify physician
Sensor not on patient
Check if the “SPO2 Sensor Off” alarm is reported.
If so, reapply the sensor.
If not, contact the service personnel.
Cables loose/not connected
Check if the sensor and cable are properly
connected.
Ambient light
Check if the “SpO2 Too Much Light” alarm is
reported. If so, move the sensor to a place with
lower level of ambient light or cover the sensor to
minimize the ambient light.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
11-7
Symptoms
Possible Cause
Correction Action
No SpO2 waveform
Waveform not selected to display
Switch the SpO2 monitoring function on as
described in 3.12.1 Switching the Parameters
On/Off.
Cable or sensor not plugged in
Check that the cable is properly connected and
sensor securely applied.
Low amplitude SpO2 signal
SpO2 sensor on same limb as cuff
Check that the sensor is properly applied. Change
the application site if necessary.
Patient has poor perfusion
11-8
Change the application site.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
12 Monitoring NIBP
12.1 Introduction
The patient monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring the non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP). This
measurement can be used for adults, pediatrics and neonates.
Automatic non-invasive blood pressure monitoring uses the oscillometric method of measurement. To understand how
this method works, we’ll compare it to the auscultative method. With auscultation, the clinician listens to the blood
pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures. The mean pressure can then be calculated with reference to
these pressures as long as the arterial pressure curve is normal.
Since the monitor cannot hear the blood pressure, it measures cuff pressure oscillation amplitudes. Oscillations are
caused by blood pressure pulses against the cuff. The oscillation with the greatest amplitude is the mean pressure. This is
the most accurate parameter measured by the oscillometric method. Once the mean pressure is determined, the systolic
and diastolic pressures are calculated with reference to the mean.
Simply stated, auscultation measures systolic and diastolic pressures and the mean pressure is calculated. The
oscillometric method measures the mean pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures.
As specified by IEC 80601-2-30, NIBP measurement can be performed during electro-surgery and discharge of
defibrillator.
NIBP diagnostic significance must be decided by the doctor who performs the measurement.
NOTE

Blood pressure measurements determined with this device are equivalent to those obtained by a trained
observer using the cuff/stethoscope auscultatory method or an intra-arterial blood pressure measurement
device, within the limits prescribed by the American National Standard, Manual, electronic, or automated
sphygmomanometers.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
12-1
12.2 Safety
WARNING

Be sure to select the correct patient category setting for your patient before measurement. Do not apply the
higher adult settings for pediatric or neonatal patients. Otherwise it may present a safety hazard.

Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or on the limb where skin damage has occurred or
is expected.

Use clinical judgment to determine whether to perform frequent unattended blood pressure measurements
on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of the risk of hematoma in the limb fitted with the
cuff.

Do not use the NIBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial catheter in place. This could cause
tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or blocked during cuff inflation.

NIBP reading can be affected by the measurement site, the position of the PATIENT, exercise, or the patient's
physiologic condition. If you doubt the NIBP measurements, determine the patient’s vital signs by
alternative means and then verify that the monitor is working correctly.

Do not apply cuff on the arm on the side of a mastectomy.
12.3 Measurement Limitations
Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40bpm or greater than 240bpm, or if the patient is
on a heart-lung machine.
The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible:

If a regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect

With excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions

With cardiac arrhythmias

Rapid blood pressure changes

Severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries

Obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from the artery
12.4 Measurement Methods
There are three methods of measuring NIBP:
12-2

Manual: measurement on demand.

Auto: continually repeated measurements at set intervals.

STAT: continually rapid series of measurements over a five minute period, then return to the previous mode.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
12.5 Setting Up the NIBP Measurement
12.5.1 Preparing the Patient
In normal use, perform NIBP measurement on a patient who is in the following position:

Comfortably seated;

Legs uncrossed;

Feet flat on the floor;

Back and arm supported; and,

Middle of the cuff at the level of the right atrium of the heart.
NOTE

It is recommended that the patient relax as much as possible before performing measurement and that the
patient do not talk during measurement.

It is recommended that 5 min should elapse before the first reading is taken.

The operator shall not touch cuff and tubing during NIBP measurement.
12.5.2 Preparing to Measure NIBP
To prepare for the NIBP measurement:
1.
Power on the monitor.
2.
Verify that the patient category is correct. If not, select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey → [Patient Demographics]
→ [Patient Cat.] and set the patient category to [Adu], [Ped] or [Neo].
3.
Plug the air tubing into the NIBP connector on the patient monitor.
4.
Select a correct sized cuff and then apply it as follows:

Determine the patient’s limb circumference.

Select an appropriate cuff by referring to the limb circumference marked on the cuff. The width of the cuff
should be 40% (50% for neonates) of the limb circumference, or 2/3 of the upper arm’s length. The inflatable
part of the cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 50% to 80% of the limb.

Apply the cuff to the patient’s upper arm or leg and make sure the Φ marking on the cuff matches the artery
location. Do not wrap the cuff too tightly around the limb. It may cause discoloration, and ischemia of the
extremities. Make sure that the cuff edge falls within the marked range. If it does not, use a larger or smaller
cuff that will fit better.
5.
Connect the cuff to the air tubing. Avoid compression or restriction of pressure tubes. Air must pass unrestricted
through the tubing.
WARNING

Continuous CUFF pressure due to connection tubing kinking may cause blood flow interference and
resulting harmful injury to the patient.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
12-3
NOTE

Equipment use is restricted to one patient at a time.
12.5.3 Starting and Stopping Measurements
Select the [NIBP Measure] QuickKey and you can start the desired measurement from the popup menu. You can select
[Stop All] QuickKey to stop all NIBP measurements. You can also start and stop measurements by using the [NIBP]
hardkey on the monitor’s front panel.
12.5.4 Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level
The cuff should be applied to a limb at the same level as the patient’s heart. If the limb is not at the heart level, to the
displayed value:

Add 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimetre higher, or

Deduct 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimeter lower.
12.5.5 Enabling NIBP Auto Cycling and Setting the Interval
To enable the NIBP auto cycling and set the interval:
1.
Select the NIBP parameter window to enter the [NIBP Setup] menu.
2.
Select [Interval] and then select a desired time interval. Selecting [Manual] switches to manual mode.
3.
Start a measurement manually. The monitor will then automatically repeat NIBP measurements at the set time
interval.
12.5.6 Starting a STAT Measurement
To start a STAT measurement:
1.
Select the NIBP parameter window to enter the [NIBP Setup] menu.
2.
Select [NIBP STAT]. The STAT mode initiates 5 minutes of continuous, sequential, automatic NIBP measurements.
WARNING

Continuous non-invasive blood pressure measurements may cause purpura, ischemia and neuropathy in the
limb with the cuff. Inspect the application site regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the cuffed limb
for normal color, warmth and sensitivity. If any abnormity occurs, move the cuff to another site or stop the
blood pressure measurements immediately.
12-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
12.6 Understanding the NIBP Numerics
The NIBP display shows numerics only as below. Your display may be configured to look slightly different.
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
1.
Time of last measurement
2.
Time remaining to next measurement
3.
Measurement mode
4.
Unit of pressure: mmHg or kPa
5.
Prompt message area: shows NIBP-related prompt messages
6.
Systolic pressure
7.
Diastolic pressure
8.
Mean pressure obtained after the measurement and cuff pressure obtained during the measurement
If the NIBP measurement exceeds the measurement range, “---” will be displayed.
12.7 Changing NIBP Settings
By selecting the NIBP parameter window, you can enter the [NIBP Setup] menu.
12.7.1 Setting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure
You can set the initial cuff inflation pressure manually. In the [NIBP Setup] menu, select [Initial Pressure] and then
select the appropriate setting.
NOTE

For known hypertensive patients, you need to set initial cuff pressure to a higher value to reduce the
measurement time.
12.7.2 Setting NIBP Alarm Properties
Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [NIBP Setup] menu. You can set the alarm properties for this parameter in the popup
menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
12-5
12.7.3 Displaying NIBP List
Select [Screens] QuickKey→[Screen Setup]. You can set [NIBP List] to be displayed on the screen, where the most
recent NIBP measurements display. Then, multiple sets of most recent NIBP measurements will be displayed. And the
displayed PR is derived from NIBP.
You can not display NIBP list in some screens such as the big numerics screen.
12.7.4 Setting the Pressure Unit
Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, select [Press. Unit] and then select
[mmHg] or [kPa].
12.7.5 Switching On NIBP End Tone
The monitor can issue a reminder tone at the completion of NIBP measurement. The NIBP End Tone is off by default. You
can switch it on by accessing the [NIBP Setup] menu.
12.8 Assisting Venous Puncture
You can use the NIBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure to block the venous blood vessel and therefore help venous
puncture.
1.
Select [VeniPuncture >>] from the [NIBP Setup] menu. In the popup menu, verify that the [Cuff Press.] value is
appropriate. Change it if necessary.
2.
Select [VeniPuncture].
3.
Puncture vein and draw blood sample.
4.
Select the [NIBP] hardkey on the monitor’s front panel, or the [Stop All] QuickKey to deflate the cuff. The cuff
deflates automatically after a set time if you do not deflate it.
During measurement, the NIBP display shows the inflation pressure of the cuff and the remaining time in venous
puncture mode.
12-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
13 Monitoring Temp
13.1 Introduction
The equipment is used to monitor skin temperature and core temperature. You can simultaneously monitor two
temperature sites using the monitor.
13.2 Safety
WARNING

Verify that the probe detection program works correctly before monitoring. Remove the temperature probe
cable from the T1 or T2 connector, and the monitor can display the message [T1 Sensor Off] or [T2 Sensor
Off] and give alarm tones correctly.
13.3 Making a Temp Measurement
The equipment is intended for monitoring skin temperature and core temperature.
1.
Select an appropriate probe for your patient according to patient type and measuring site.
2.
If you are using a disposable probe, connect the probe to the temperature cable.
3
Plug the probe or temperature cable to the temperature connector.
4.
Attach the probe to the patient correctly.
5.
Check that the alarm settings are appropriate for this patient.
13.4 Understanding the Temp Display
The temperature monitoring is displayed on the monitor as three numerics: T1, T2 and TD. By selecting this area, you can
enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
13-1
13.5 Setting the Temperature Unit
Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the pop-up menu, select [Temp Unit] and then select [ºC]
or [ºF].
13-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14 Monitoring IBP
14.1 Introduction
The Passport 12 monitor can monitor up to 4 invasive blood pressures and Passport 8 monitors can monitor up to 2
invasive blood pressures (using an external module). The monitor can display the systolic, diastolic and mean pressures
and a waveform for each pressure.
14.2 Safety
WARNING

Use only pressure transducers specified in this manual. Never reuse disposable pressure transducers.

Make sure that the applied parts never contact other conductive parts.

To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure, ensure that the monitor’s cables
and transducers never come into contact with the high-frequency surgical units.

When using accessories, their operating temperature should be taken into consideration. For details, refer
to instructions for use of accessories.

The neutral electrode of the electro-surgery unit (ESU) shall properly contact the patient. Otherwise, burns
may result.
14.3 Zeroing the Transducer
To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in accordance with your
hospital policy (at least once per day).
Zero whenever:

A new transducer or adapter cable is used.

You reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor.

The monitor restarts.

You doubt the readings.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14-1
To zero the transducer:
1.
Turn off the stopcock to the patient.
Pressure transducer
3-way stopcock
Pressure adapter cable
Monitor
2.
Vent the transducer to the atmospheric pressure by turning on the stopcock to the air.
3.
In the setup menu for the pressure (e.g. Art), select [Art Zero >>]→[Zero]. During zero calibration, the [Zero]
button appears dimmed. It recovers after the zero calibration is completed. To zero all IBP channels, select [Zero
IBP] hotkey, and then select [Zero All Channels] in the pop-up menu.
4.
After the zero calibration is completed, close the stopcock to the air and open the stopcock to the patient.
NOTE

Your hospital policy may recommend that the ICP transducer is zeroed less frequently than other
transducers.
14.4 Setting Up the Pressure Measurement
To set up the pressure measurement:
1.
Plug the pressure cable into the IBP connector.
2.
Prepare the flush solution.
3.
Flush the system to exhaust all air from the tubing. Ensure that the transducer and stopcocks are free of air bubbles.
WARNING

If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air bubble may
lead to wrong pressure reading.
14-2
4.
Connect the pressure line to the patient catheter.
5.
Position the transducer so that it is level with the heart, approximately at the level of the midaxillary line.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
6.
Select the appropriate label.
7.
Zero the transducer. After a successful zeroing, turn off the stopcock to the air and turn on the stopcock to the
patient.
Heparinized
fluid bag
Pressure
transducer
Valve
Stopcock
Flushing set
Adapter cable for using
disposable transducers
Pressure line
Monitor
WARNING

If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP) with a sitting patient, level the transducer with the top of the
patient’s ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect values.
14.5 Understanding the IBP Display
The IBP measurement is displayed on the monitor as a waveform and numeric pressures. The figure below shows the
waveform and numerics for the Art pressure. For different pressures, this display may be slightly different.
1
1.
Waveform
2.
Pressure unit
3.
Systolic pressure
4.
Diastolic pressure
5.
Mean pressure
2
3
4
5
For some pressures, the parameter window may show the mean pressure only. For different pressures, their defaults unit
may be different. If the Art and ICP pressures are measured simultaneously, the ICP parameter area will display numeric
CPP, which is obtained by subtracting ICP from the Art mean.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14-3
14.6 Changing IBP Settings
14.6.1 Changing a Pressure for Monitoring
To change a pressure for monitoring:
1.
Select the pressure you want to change to enter its setup menu. In the menu, there is a figure showing the current
IBP measurement connector.
2.
Select [Label] and then select your desired label from the list. Labels already used cannot be selected.
Label
Description
Label
Description
PA
Pulmonary artery pressure
CVP
Central venous pressure
Ao
Aortic pressure
LAP
Left atrial pressure
UAP
Umbilical arterial pressure
RAP
Right atrial pressure
BAP
Brachial arterial pressure
ICP
Intracranial pressure
FAP
Femoral arterial pressure
UVP
Umbilical venous pressure
Art
Arterial blood pressure
LV
Left ventricular pressure
P1 to P4
Non-specific pressure label
NOTE

When two pressures are detected having the same label, the monitor changes one pressure label to a
currently unused one.
14.6.2 Setting Alarm Properties
Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the parameter setup menu. You can set alarm properties for this parameter in the pop-up
menu.
14-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14.6.3 Changing Averaging Time
The IBP value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The shorter the
averaging time is, the quicker the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s blood pressure. Contrarily, the longer the
averaging time is, the slower the monitor responds to changes in the patient’s blood pressure, but the measurement
accuracy will be improved. For critically ill patients, selecting shorter averaging time will help understanding the
patient’s state.
To set the averaging time, in the parameter setup menu, select [Sensitivity] and then select [High], [Med] or [Low], the
corresponding averaging time is about 1 s, 8 s and 12 s respectively.
14.6.4 Setting Up the IBP Wave
In the setup menu for the pressure, you can:

Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

Select [Scale] and then select the appropriate setting. If [Auto] is selected, the size of the pressure’s waveform will
be adjusted automatically.

Select [Filter] and then select the desired option.
14.6.5 Setting the Pressure Unit
Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the pop-up menu, select [Press. Unit] and then select
[mmHg] or [kPa]. Select [CVP Unit] and then select [mmHg], [cmH2O] or [kPa].
14.6.6 Enabling PPV Measurement and Setting PPV Source
PPV indicates pulse pressure variation. To enable PPV measurement, set [PPV Measurement] to [On].
You can select PPV source by enabling the PPV measurement.
WARNING

This monitor can calculate PPV from beat-to-beat values of any arterial pulsatile pressure. The
circumstances under which the calculation of a PPV value is clinically meaningful, appropriate and reliable
must be determined by a physician.

The clinical value of the derived PPV information must be determined by a physician. According to recent
scientific literature, the clinical relevance of PPV information is restricted to sedated patients receiving
controlled mechanical ventilation and mainly free from cardiac arrhythmia.


PPV calculation may lead to inaccurate values in the following situations:

at respiration rates below 8 rpm

during ventilation with tidal volumes lower than 8 ml/kg

for patients with acute right ventricular dysfunction (“cor pulmonale”).
The PPV measurement has been validated only for adult patients.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14-5
14.7 Overlapping IBP Waveforms
The IBP waveforms can be displayed together. To combine IBP waveforms,
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup>>]→[Screen Layout>>] to access the [Screens] window.
2.
Select the [Screen Setup] tab.
3.
In Area A, select [IBP Overlap] from the drop-down list, and then select the IBP waves to be overlapped on the left
side of the same line.
Area A
4.
Select
to save the setting and exit the window. The main screen will display the overlapped IBP waves.
Selecting the overlapped IBP waveforms on the main screen opens the [Overlapping Waveform Setup] menu, where
you can:

Set [Left Scale] and [Right Scale] and then set the scales for the overlapped waveforms. The left scale is for Art, LV,
Ao, FAP, BAP, UAP, and the arterial waveforms of P1~P4; the right scale is for CVP, ICP, LAP, RAP, UVP, and the
venous waveforms of P1~P4.

Set [CVP Scale] individually if the CVP waveform is combined and CVP unit is different from IBP unit.

Set [PA Scale] individually if PA waveform is combined.

Set [Gridlines] to [On] or [Off] to show gridlines or not in the overlapped waveform area.

Select [Sweep] and then set the sweep speed for the overlapped waveforms.

Select [Filter] and then set the filter for the overlapped waveforms.
You can also change above settings from corresponding IBP setup menu.
Note

The CVP scale changes simultaneously with right scale. The unit of CVP scale is consistent with CVP
parameter unit.
14-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14.8 Measuring PAWP
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP) values, used to assess cardiac function, are affected by fluid status, myocardial
contractility, and valve and pulmonary circulation integrity.
Obtain the measurement by introducing a balloon-tipped pulmonary artery flotation catheter into the pulmonary artery.
When the catheter is in one of the smaller pulmonary arteries, the inflated balloon occludes the artery allowing the
monitor to record changes in the intrathoracic pressures that occur throughout the respiration cycle.
The pulmonary wedge pressure is the left ventricular end diastolic pressure when the airway pressure and valve function
are normal. The most accurate PAWP values are obtained at the end of the respiration cycle when the intrathoracic
pressure is fairly constant and the artifact caused by respiration is minimal.
WARNING

PAWP monitoring is not intended for neonatal patients.
14.8.1 Preparing to Measure PAWP
To prepare for the PAWP measurement:
1.
Prepare the same accessories as in the C.O. measurement. Connect the parts such as catheter, syringe, etc.
following the C.O. measurement steps and use the balloon inflation port. Refer to section 15.4 Setting Up the C.O.
Measurement for more information.
2.
Connect the PAWP cable into the IBP connector on the monitor. Since PAWP is measured on PA, selecting [PA] as
the IBP label is recommended.
3.
Select the PA parameter window or waveform area to enter its setup menu. Then, select [PAWP] to enter the PAWP
measurement window. You can also enter the PAWP measurement window from the P1-P4 parameter window.
NOTE

After entering the PAWP measurement window, the monitor will turn off the PA alarm automatically.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14-7
14.8.2 Setting Up the PAWP Measurement
To setup the PAWP measurement:
1.
Wedge the flotation catheter into the pulmonary artery. Then inflate the balloon and pay attention to the PA
waveform changes on the screen.
2.
After obtaining a stable PAWP waveform, press the [Freeze] key to freeze the waveform and deflate the balloon.
3.
You can adjust the PAWP scale to an appropriate position by adjusting
or
beside the [Adjust] button.
Press the [Confirm] key to save one PAWP measurement.
4.
If you need to start a new measurement, select [Next Measure].
WARNING

Prolonged inflation can cause pulmonary hemorrhage, infarction or both. Inflate the balloon for the
minimum time necessary to get an accurate measurement.

If the PAWP is greater than the PA (systolic), deflate the balloon and report the incident in accordance with
hospital policy. Because the pulmonary artery could be accidentally ruptured, and the PAWP value derived
will not reflect the patient’s hemodynamic state, but will merely reflect the pressure in the catheter or
balloon.
14.8.3 Understanding the PAWP Setup Menu
Select [Setup] to enter the [PAWP Setup] menu. In this menu, you can:
14-8

Select an ECG lead wave as the first reference wave.

Select a respiration wave as the second reference wave.

Select a sweep speed for the displayed waveform.

Change the size of the PA waveform by adjusting the scale height.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14.9 Troubleshooting
This section lists the problems that might occur. If you encounter the problems when using the equipment or
accessories, check the table below before requesting for services. If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.
CAUTION

Never try to disassemble the equipment or supplied accessories. There are no internal user-serviceable
parts.
Symptoms
Possible Cause
Correction Action
Damped invasive
Air bubbles in tubing
Eliminate air from tubing as described in section
14.4 Setting Up the Pressure Measurement.
waveform
Kinked catheter
Change the position of catheter.
Blood in tubing
Pressurize the solution bag to 300 mmHg. For
details, refer to the instructions for use of the
solution bag.
IBP not displayed/no IBP
Improper setup
Check display setup in monitor setup.
waveform
Cable not plugged in
Check that the cables are properly connected.
Transducer not connected.
Check that the transducer is properly connected.
Stopcock turned improperly.
Check that the stopcock is turned to the correct
position.
Transducer not zeroed
Check and zero the transducer as described in
section 14.3 Zeroing the Transducer.
Dashes “- -” display in place
The measured result is invalid or out of
of numerics.
range.
Change to a pulsatile label.
IBP might be set to non-pulsatile labels
like CVP, LA, RA, and ICP.
Abnormally high or low
Transducer too High or too Low.
readings
Adjust the position of the transducer and make
sure that it is level with the heart, approximately at
the level of the midaxillary line.
Zero the transducer as described in 14.3 Zeroing
the Transducer.
Unable to Zero
Stopcock not open to atmosphere.
Check the transducer and make sure the stopcock
is turned to the air.
PAWP button disabled
One IBP channel must be labeled PA
Label an IBP channel as PA. (Also Label an IBP
channel as P1/P2/P3/P4, it will automatically
change to PA)
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
14-9
FOR YOUR NOTES
14-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
15 Monitoring Cardiac Output
15.1 Introduction
The cardiac output (C.O.) measurement invasively measures cardiac output and other hemodynamic parameters using
the right heart (atria) thermodilution method. A cold solution of known volume and temperature is injected into the
right atrium through the proximal port of a pulmonary artery (PA) catheter. The cold solution mixes with the blood in the
right ventricle and the change in blood temperature is measured with a thermistor at the distal end of the catheter in
the pulmonary artery. The temperature change is displayed as a curve in the C.O. split screen, and the monitor calculates
the C.O. value from this curve. The C.O. value is inversely proportional to the area under the curve. As cardiac output
varies continuously, a series of measurements must be carried out to achieve a reliable C.O. average value. Always use
the average of multiple thermodilution measurements for therapy decisions. The monitor is capable of storing 6
measurements.
WARNING

C.O. monitoring is restricted to adult patients only.
15.2 Understanding the C.O. Display
The C.O. measurement is displayed on the monitor as numeric C.O., C.I. and TB in the C.O. parameter window as shown
below. To enter the [C.O. Setup] menu, select the C.O. parameter window.
2
1
3
4
1.
Cardiac output
2.
Time at which the C.O. average is calculated
3.
Cardiac index
4.
Blood temperature
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
15-1
15.3 Influencing Factors
The factors that affect cardiac output are:

temperature of injectate solution,

volume of injectate solution,

patient’s baseline blood temperature,

patient’s inspiratory/expiratory cycle,

placement of catheter with relation to proximity of lung field,

the catheter itself,

the patient rhythm and hemodynamic status, and

any other rapid IV solutions which are infused while the C.O. measurement is being performed.
Followings are some technical suggestions to obtain accurate C.O.:
15-2

Injectate solution must be cooler than the patient’s blood.

Inject solution rapidly and smoothly.

Inject at end of expiration.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
15.4 Setting Up the C.O. Measurement
WARNING

Use only accessories specified in this manual. Make sure that the accessories never come into contact with
conductive parts.
To set up the C.O. measurement:
1.
Connect the C.O. cable to the C.O. connector on the monitor.
2.
Interconnect the C.O. module, catheter and syringe as shown below. Make sure that:

The module is securely inserted.

The PA catheter is in place in the patient.

The C.O. cable is properly connected to the module.
Injectate
C.O. module
C.O. cable
Syringe
PA catheter
Stopcock
Hole
In-line probe
Balloon inflation port
Ice water
NOTE

The above picture illustrates when using a TI sensor (PN 6000-10-02079). The connection may be different if
other TI sensors are used.
3.
Select the C.O. parameter window to enter the [C.O. Setup] menu. Check if the height and weight are appropriate
for your patient. Change if necessary.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
15-3
4.
In the [C.O. Setup] menu:

Check that the correct computation constant is entered. Refer to the Instruction for Use of pulmonary artery
catheter to determine the [Comp. Const] according to the entered injectate volume and temperature. To
change the computation constant, select [Comp. Const] and then enter the correct value. When a new
catheter is used, the computation constant should be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions for use.

Set the [Auto TI] to [Manual] or [Auto]. If you select [Auto], the system automatically detects the injectate
temperature, and the [Manual TI(°C)] is disabled. If you select [Manual], you need to enter the injectate
temperature at [Manual TI(°C)] manually.

Set the [Measuring Mode] to [Manual] or [Auto]. In [Auto] mode, the monitor automatically takes C.O.
measurement after establishing a baseline blood temperature. In [Manual] mode, you need to click the [Start]
button in the C.O. measurements window when the monitor is ready for new C.O. measurement.
5.
Select [Enter C.O. Screen] to enter the C.O. measurements window.
A
F
B
C
E
D
A.
Currently measured numeric
B.
Currently measured C.O. curve
C.
Prompt message area
D.
Buttons
E.
Averaged values
F.
Measurement windows
6.
Proceed as follows.

In [Manual] measure mode, select the [Start] button and then inject the solution quickly when you see the
message [Ready for new set of measurement]. As shown in the figure above, during the measurement, the
currently measured thermodilution curve is displayed. At the end of the measurement, the thermodilution
curve is transferred to one of the 6 measurement windows and the monitor prompts you to wait for a certain
period of time before starting a new measurement.
15-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual

In [Auto] measure mode, the monitor consecutively takes C.O. measurements automatically without the need
for pressing the [Start] button between two measurements. A new thermodilution measurement is possible as
soon as the message [Inject now!] is displayed on the screen. The monitor automatically detects further
thermodilution measurements.
7.
Consecutively take 3 to 5 single measurements as instructed by Step 6.
A maximum of 6 measurements can be stored. If you perform more than six measurements without rejecting any, the
oldest will automatically be deleted when a seventh curve is stored. Select from the 6 measurement curves and the
system will automatically calculate and display the averaged C.O. and C.I. values. Then select the [Accept Average]
button to accept and store the averaged values.
When injecting, the stopcock to the PA catheter is open and the stopcock to the injectate solution is closed. After the
measurement is completed, turn off the stopcock to the PA catheter and turn on the stopcock to the injectate solution,
and then draw the injectate solution into the injectate syringe.
In the buttons area, you can:

Select [Start] to start a C.O. measurement.

Select [Stop] to stop the current measurement.

Select [Cancel] during a measurement to cancel the measurement. Selecting it after a measurement deletes the
measured results.

Select [Record] to print out the curves selected for average calculation, numerics and averaged values by the
recorder.

Select [Setup >>] to access the [C.O. Setup] menu.

Select [Calc >>]→[Hemodynamic >>] to access the [Hemodynamic Calculation] menu.
The system can automatically adjust the X-axis scale range to 30 s or 60 s and Y-axis scale range to 0.5°C, 1.0°C, or 2.0°C.
CAUTION

Starting a measurement without blood temperature being stable may cause measuring failure.
NOTE

During a cardiac output measurement, blood temperature alarms are inactive.

Please refer to the Instructions for Use of the pulmonary artery catheter to determine the [Comp. Const] and
the volume of injectate.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
15-5
15.5 Measuring the Blood Temperature
As shown below, the blood temperature is measured with a temperature sensor at the distal end of the catheter in the
pulmonary artery. During C.O. measurements, blood temperature alarms are suppressed to avoid false alarms. They will
automatically recover as soon as the C.O. measurements are completed.
Pulmonary artery
PA catheter
Right atrium
Balloon
Sensor
Right ventricle
15.6 Changing C.O. Settings
15.6.1 Setting the Temperature Unit
Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the pop-up menu, select [Temp Unit] and then select [°C]
or [°F].
15.6.2 Setting Alarm Properties
Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [C.O. Setup] menu. You can set alarm properties for this parameter in the pop-up
menu.
15-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16 Monitoring CO
2
16.1 Introduction
CO2 monitoring is a continuous, non-invasive technique for determining the concentration of CO2 in the patient’s airway
by measuring the absorption of infrared (IR) light of specific wavelengths. CO2 has its own absorption characteristic and
the amount of light passing the gas probe depends on the concentration of the measured CO2. When a specific band of
IR light passes through respiratory gas samples, some of IR light will be absorbed by the CO2 molecules. The amount of
IR light transmitted after it has been passed through the respiratory gas sample is measured with a photodetector. From
the amount of IR light measured, the concentration of CO2 is calculated.
Sidestream/Microstream measurement samples expired patient gas at a constant sample flow from the patient’s airway
and analyzes it with a CO2 sensor built into the CO2 module.
The sidestream and microstream CO2 measurement can be used, with specified accessories, with intubated and
non-intubated adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients. With intubated patients, a sample of the respiratory gas is drawn
from the patient's breathing circuit through an airway adapter and a gas sampling line. With non-intubated patients, the
gas sample is drawn through a nasal cannula.
The measurement provides:
1.
A CO2 waveform.
2.
End tidal CO2 value (EtCO2): the CO2 value measured at the end of the expiration phase.
3.
Fraction of inspired CO2 (FiCO2): the smallest CO2 value measured during inspiration.
4.
Airway respiration rate (awRR): the number of breaths per minute, calculated from the CO2 waveform.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16-1
16.2 CO2 Module
This monitor uses an external module to perform CO2 monitoring.
2
2
1
3
1.
CO2 watertrap seat
2.
Gas outlet
3.
Connector for sampling line
16.3 Preparing to Measure CO2
WARNING

Check that the alarm limit settings are appropriate before taking measurement.

Eliminate the exhausted gas before performing the measurement.
NOTE

16-2
Perform the measurement in a well-ventilated environment.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16.3.1 Making a Sidestream CO2 Measurement
To make a sidestream CO2 measurement:
1.
Attach the watertrap to the module and then connect the CO2 components as shown below.
Watertrap fixer
Sampling line
Watertrap
2.
The CO2 module needs time to warm up to reach operating temperature. The message [CO2 Sensor Warmup] is
displayed during warm-up.
3.
After warm-up is finished, you can perform CO2 measurements.
CAUTION

The watertrap collects water drops condensed in the sampling line and therefore prevents them from
entering the module. To avoid blocking the airway, empty the watertrap container whenever half full.
Dispose of accumulated fluids in accordance with hospital policy or your local regulations.

The watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the module. After
long-term use, dust or other substances may compromise the performance of the filter or even block the
airway. In this case, replace the watertrap. It is recommended that you replace the watertrap once a month,
or when the watertrap is found leaky, damaged or contaminated.

Do not apply adult watertrap to the neonate patient. Otherwise, patient injury could result.
NOTE

To extend the life of the watertrap and module, disconnect the watertrap and set the CO2 module operating
mode to the Standby mode when CO2 monitoring is not required.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16-3
16.3.2 Making a Microstream CO2 Measurement
Connect the sampling line to the module and then connect the CO2 components as shown below. After warm-up is
finished, you can perform CO2 measurements.
Connector for sampling line
Sampling line
16.4 Changing CO2 Settings
16.4.1 Accessing CO2 Menus
By selecting the CO2 parameter window, you can access the [CO2 Setup] menu.
16.4.2 Entering the Standby Mode
The Standby mode of the CO2 module relates to the Standby mode of the monitor as follows:

If the monitor enters the Standby mode, the CO2 module will also enter the Standby mode.

If the monitor exits the Standby mode, the CO2 module will also exit the Standby mode.

If the CO2 module enters or exits the Standby mode, it will not affect the monitor.
To enter or exit the Standby mode manually:
1.
Select [Operating Mode] in the [CO2 Setup] menu
2.
Select [Standby] or [Measure].
When you set the sidestream CO2 module to the Standby mode, the CO2 gas sample intake pump automatically sets the
sample flow rate to zero. When exiting the Standby mode, the CO2 module continues to work at the previously set
sample flow rate.
For the sidestream CO2 module, you can set a delay time after which, the CO2 module will enter the Standby mode if no
breath is detected.
16-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
For the microstream CO2 module, you can also set a period of time after which the CO2 module enters the Standby mode
if no breath is detected, or since the CO2 module was powered on, or since the CO2 module was switched to the
measuring mode, or the automatic Standby time is re-set.
To set the Standby time:
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu:
2.
Select [Auto Standby] and then select the appropriate setting.
16.4.3 Setting the CO2 Unit
To set the CO2 unit:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance]→enter the required password →[Unit Setup >>].
2.
In the Unit Setup menu, select [CO2 Unit] and then select [mmHg], [%] or [kPa].
16.4.4 Setting up Gas Compensations
WARNING

Make sure to use the appropriate compensations. Inappropriate compensations may cause inaccurate
measurement values and result in misdiagnosis.
For the sidestream CO2 module:
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup].
2.
According to the actual condition, set the concentration required for the following compensations:

[O2 Compen]

[N2O Compen]

[Des Compen]
For the microstream CO2 module, gas compensations are not required.
16.4.5 Setting up Humidity Compensation
Sidestream and microstream CO2 modules are configured to compensate CO2 readings for either Body Temperature and
Pressure, Saturated Gas (BTPS), to account for humidity in the patient’s breath, or Ambient Temperature and Pressure,
Dry Gas (ATPD).
1.
ATPD:
Pco2 (mmHg) = CO2 (vol%) × Pamb /100
2.
BTPS:
PCO2 (mmHg) = CO 2 (vol%) × (Pamb / 47)/100
Where, PCO2 = partial pressure,
vol% = CO2 concentration, Pamb = ambient pressure, and unit is mmHg.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16-5
For the sidestream and microstream CO2 module, you can set the humidity compensation on or off according to the
actual condition. To set the humidity compensation:
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu, and then select [BTPS Compen].
2.
Select either [On] for BTPS or [Off] for ATPD, depending on which compensation applies.
16.4.6 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay
To set the apnea alarm delay:
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu.
2.
Select [Apnea Delay] and then select the appropriate setting.
The monitor will alarm if the patient has stopped breathing for longer than the selected apnea time. The setting of
[Apnea Delay] takes effect simultaneously to the Resp, CO2, and AG modules.
WARNING

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no breath
is detected when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it cannot be
used for diagnostic purpose.
16.4.7 Choosing a Time Interval for Peak-Picking
For microstream modules, you can select a time interval for picking the highest CO2 as the EtCO2 and the lowest as the
FiCO2.
To set the time interval:
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu.
2.
Select [Max Hold]
3.
Select [Single Breath], [10 s], [20 s] or [30 s]

[Single Breath]: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated for every breath.

[10 s], [20 s] or [30 s]: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated using 10, 20 or 30 seconds of data.
16.4.8 Setting the Flow Rate
For the sidestream CO2 module, you can change the sampling rate of respiratory gas in the patient’s airway by setting
the flow rate.
To set the flow rate:
16-6
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu.
2.
Select an appropriate setting from [Flow Rate].
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
WARNING

Please consider the patient’s actual bearing capability and select the appropriate flow rate when setting the
flow rate.
16.4.9 Setting up the CO2 Wave
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu, in which you can:

Select [Wave Type] and then select [Draw] or [Fill]:

[Draw]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a curved line.

[Fill]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a filled area.

Select [Sweep], and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

Change the size of the CO2 waveform by adjusting the wave [Scale].
16.5 Setting RR Source
To set RR source:
1.
Select the CO2 parameter window to access the [CO2 Setup] menu.
2.
Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.
The [RR Source] setting takes effect simultaneously to the Resp, CO2, and AG modules. For details, please refer to section
9.9 Setting Respiration Rate Source.
16.6 Barometric Pressure Compensation
Both sidestream and microstream CO2 modules have the function of automatic barometric pressure compensation (the
system automatically measures the barometric pressure which the monitor is exposed to).
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16-7
16.7 Measurement Limitations
Some adverse effects can influence the CO2 performance.
CAUTION



The following factors may influence the accuracy of measurement:

Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas

Mechanical shock

Cyclic pressure up to 10 kPa (100 cmH2O)

Other sources of interference, if any
Measurement accuracy may be affected by the breath rate and I/E ratio as follow:

etCO2 is within specification for breath rate ≤ 60 bpm and I/E ratio ≤ 1:1;

etCO2 is within specification for breath rate ≤ 30 bpm and I/E ratio ≤ 2:1.
Measurement accuracy is unspecified for breath rate larger than 60 bpm.
16.8 Leakage test
When the sidestream CO2 module needs maintenance, the monitor displays the message in the CO2 waveform window:
[Need maintenance. Enter CO2 setup menu.] Then:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→[Maintain
CO2 >>].
2.
Perform leakage test according to the prompt messages on the menu.
16.9 Troubleshooting the Sidestream CO2 Sampling System
When the sampling system of the sidestream CO2 module does not work correctly, check to see if the sampling line is
kinked. If the sampling line is not kinked, remove it from the watertrap. If the monitor gives a message indicating the
sampling system still does not work correctly, it indicates that the watertrap is blocked and should be replaced with a
new one. Otherwise, the sampling line is blocked and should be replaced with a new one.
16-8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16.10 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING

Anesthetics: When using the Sidestream or Microstream CO2 measurement on patients who are receiving or
have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia
machine/ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.
To remove the sample gas to a scavenging system, connect an exhaust tube to the gas outlet connector of the module.
16.11 Zeroing the Sensor
Zero calibration eliminates the effect of baseline drift during CO2 measurement exerted on the readings and therefore
maintains the accuracy of the CO2 measurements.
For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, a zero calibration is carried out automatically when necessary. You can
also start a manual zero calibration if necessary.
To manually start a zero calibration:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→[Maintain
CO2 >>].
2.
Select [Calibrate CO2 >>]→[Start Zero Cal.].
Disconnecting the patient airway is not required when performing a zero calibration.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
16-9
16.12 Calibrating the Sensor
For sidestream or microstream CO2 modules, a calibration should be performed once every year or when the readings go
far beyond the range.
Oridion Information
16.13 Oridion Information
This trademark is registered in Israel, Japan, German and America.
Oridion Patents
The capnography component of this product is covered by one or more of the following US patents: 6,428,483;
6,997,880; 6,437,316; 7,488,229; 7,726,954 and their foreign equivalents. Additional patent applications pending.
No Implied License
Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with
unauthorized CO2 sampling consumables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of
one or more of the patents relating to this device and/or CO2 sampling consumable.
16-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17 Monitoring AG
17.1 Introduction
The anaesthetic gas (AG) module measures the patient’s anesthetic and respiratory gases by connecting to the airway of
intubated patients or collecting the gases with specified accessories. It also incorporates the features of the O2 module
and BIS module. The AG measurement is applicable for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients. AG monitoring is for
Passport 12 patient monitors only.
The AG module determines the concentration of certain gases using the infrared (IR) light absorption measurement. The
gases that can be measured by the AG module absorb IR light. Each gas has its own absorption characteristic. The gas is
transported into a sample cell, and an optical IR filter selects a specific band of IR light to pass through the gas. For
multiple gas measurements, there are multiple IR filters. The higher the concentration of gas in a given volume the more
IR light is absorbed. This means that higher concentration of IR absorbing gas cause a lower transmission of IR light. The
amount of IR light transmitted after it has been passed through an IR absorbing gas is measured. From the amount of IR
light measured, the concentration of gas present can be calculated.
Oxygen does not absorb IR light as other breathing gases and is therefore measured relying on its paramagnetic
properties. Inside the O2 sensor are two nitrogen-filled glass spheres mounted on a strong rare metal taut-band
suspension. This assembly is suspended in a symmetrical non-uniform magnetic field. In the presence of paramagnetic
oxygen, the glass spheres are pushed further away from the strongest part of the magnetic field. The strength of the
torque acting on the suspension is proportional to the oxygen concentration. From the strength of the torque, the
concentration of oxygen is calculated.
AG module can identify two anesthetic gases in a mixture automatically and distinguish between them according to
their contributions to the MAC value for display as the primary and secondary anesthetic agents.
NOTE

The AG module is configured with automatic barometric pressure compensation function.

Perform the measurement in a well-ventilated environment.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17-1
17.2 Understanding the AG Display
The AG module can send waves and numerics for all measured anesthetic gases for display on the monitor, including:

CO2, O2, N2O and AA waves

awRR: airway respiratory rate

MAC: minimum alveolar concentration

End tidal (Et) and fraction of inspired (Fi) numerics for CO2, O2, N2O and AA
Where AA represents Des (desflurane), Iso (isoflurane), Enf (enflurane), Sev (sevoflurane), or Hal (halothane).
The AA waveform area displays the primary anesthetic gas’s waveform. When O2 module does not exist, no O2 waveform
will be displayed. When O2 module exists, the O2 waveform will be displayed only when the O2 waveform is currently
switched on.
WARNING

To avoid explosion hazard, do not use flammable anesthetic agent such as ether and cyclopropane for this
equipment.
17.3 MAC Values
Minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) is the minimum concentration of the agent in the alveoli. It is a basic index to
indicate the depth of anesthesia. The standard ISO 21647 defines MAC as this: alveolar concentration of an inhaled
anesthetic agent that, in the absence of other anesthetic agents and at equilibrium, prevents 50% of patients from
moving in response to a standard surgical stimulus.
Minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) values are listed below:
Agent
Des
Iso
Enf
Sev
Hal
N2O
1 MAC
6%*
1.15%
1.7%
2.1%
0.77%
105%**
* The data is taken from a 25-year-old patient.
** indicates 1 MAC nitrous oxide can only be reached in hyperbaric chamber.
17-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
NOTE

The MAC values shown in the table above are those published by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for
a healthy 40-year-old adult male patient.

In actual applications, the MAC value may be affected by age, weight and other factors.
The formula to calculate the MAC value is as follows:
N −1
MAC = ∑
i =0
EtAgent i
AgentVol age i
Where N is the number of all agents (including N2O) that the AG module can measure, EtAgenti is the concentration of
each agent, and AgentVolagei is the concentration of each agent at 1 MAC with age correction.
The formula for calculating age correction of 1 MAC is:
MAC age = MAC 40 × 10 ( −0.00269×( age − 40 ))
For example, the Des concentration at 1 MAC of a 60-year old patient is
6% × 10 ( −0.00269×( 60− 40 )) = 6% × 0.88 .
The AG module measures there are 4% of Des, 0.5% of Hal and 50% of N2O in the patient’s end-tidal gas:
MAC =
0 .5 %
50%
4 .0 %
+
+
= 2.04
6% × 0.88 0.77% × 0.88 105% × 0.88
NOTE

The formula above is only suitable for patients who are older than one year. If the patient is less than one
year, the system uses one year to do age correction.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17-3
17.4 Preparing to Measure AG
1.
Select an appropriate watertrap according to patient category and attach it to the module.
2.
Connect the gas sample line to the watertrap connector.
3.
Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to the patient via the airway adapter.
4.
Connect the gas outlet to a scavenging system using an exhaust tube.
AG module
Airway adapter
Exhaust tube
Gas sample line
Connect to the patient
5.
Insert the AG module to the monitor and the monitor will prompt [AG Startup]. Then the AG module starts to
warmup and at the same time the monitor prompts [AG Warmup]. After 45 seconds, the AG module enters the iso
accuracy mode. After 10 minutes, the module enters the full accuracy mode.
WARNING

Make sure that the connections are tight. Any leak in the system can result in erroneous readings due to
ambient air mixing with patient gases.

Do not apply adult watertrap to the neonate patient. Otherwise, patient injury could result.

Using high-frequency electrosurgical units may increase the risk of skin burn. In this case, do not use
antistatic or conductive respiratory tubing.

Check that the alarm limit settings are appropriate before taking measurement.
CAUTION

Position the airway adapter so that the part connecting to the gas sample line is pointing upwards. This
prevents condensed water from passing into the gas sample line and causing an occlusion.

The watertrap collects water drops condensed in the sampling line and therefore prevents them from
entering the module. To avoid blocking the airway, empty the watertrap container whenever half full.
Dispose of accumulated fluids in accordance with the hospital policy or your local regulations.

The watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the module. After
long-term use, dust or other substances may compromise the performance of the filter or even block the
airway. In this case, replace the watertrap. Replacing the watertrap once a month is recommended.
17-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17.5 Changing AG Settings
17.5.1 Setting Gas Unit
For N2O and AA, the unit of the measured gas is fixed to %.
To set the gas unit:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance] →enter the required password→[Unit Setup >>].
2.
In the Unit Setup menu, you can select [CO2 Unit] or [O2 Unit] and then select [mmHg], [%] or [kPa].
17.5.2 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay
To set the apnea alarm delay:
1.
Select the AG parameter area to access the [AG Setup] menu.
2.
Select [Apnea Delay] and select the appropriate setting.
The monitor alarms if the patient has stopped breathing for longer than the preset apnea time. The [Apnea Delay]
setting takes effect simultaneously to the Resp, CO2, and AG modules.
WARNING

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no breath
is detected when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it cannot be
used for diagnostic purposes.
17.5.3 Changing the Sample Flow Rate
In the setup menu for any gas, select [Flow Rate] and then choose either:

[High]: 200 ml/min for adult and pediatric patients, and 120 ml/min for neonatal patients.

[Med]: 150 ml/min for adult and pediatric patients, and 90 ml/min for neonatal patients.

[Low]: 120 ml/min for adult and pediatric patients, and 70 ml/min for neonatal patients.
17.5.4 Setting up the O2 Compensation
If the AG module does not incorporate the O2 module, you need to manually select [O2 Compen] and then select [Off]
or an appropriate setting according to the amount of O2 in the ventilation gas mixture. When the amount of O2 is less
than 30%, switch the compensation off.
If the AG module incorporates the O2 module, the system directly uses the O2 concentration detected by the O2 module
to make compensation. At this time, the [O2 Compen] in the setup menu for any gas is fixed to [Off].
WARNING

Make sure to use the appropriate compensations. Inappropriate compensations may cause inaccurate
measurement values and result in misdiagnosis.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17-5
17.5.5 Entering the Standby Mode
For the AG module, the default operating mode is measure. When you set the AG module to the Standby mode, the AG
gas sample intake pump automatically sets the sample flow rate to zero. When exiting the Standby mode, the AG
module continues to work at preset sample flow rate with no need to warm up again. After nearly 1 minute, the module
enters the full accuracy mode. The AG module Standby mode relates to the Standby mode of the monitor as follows:

If the monitor enters the Standby mode, the AG module also enters the Standby mode.

If the monitor exits the Standby mode, the AG module also exits the Standby mode.

If the AG module enters or exits the Standby mode, it does not affect the monitor.
To enter or exit the Standby mode manually, in the agent’s setup menu, select [Operating Mode] and then select
[Standby] or [Measure]. You can also set a period of time after which the AG module enters the Standby mode
automatically if no breath is detected since the last detected breath. To set the Standby time, in the agent’s setup menu,
select [Auto Standby (min)] and then select the appropriate setting.
17.5.6 Setting up the AG Wave
Select the AG parameter area to access the [AG Setup] menu, in which you can:

Select [CO2 Wave Type] and then select [Draw] or [Fill]:

[Draw]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a curved line.

[Fill]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a filled area.

Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

Change the size of the waveform by adjusting the scale.
17.5.7 Setting RR Source
To set RR source:
1.
Select the AG parameter area to access the [AG Setup] menu.
2.
Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.
The [RR Source] setting takes effect simultaneously to the Resp, CO2, and AG modules. For details, please refer to the
section 9.9 Setting Respiration Rate Source.
17.6 Changing the Anesthetic Agent
When the anesthetic agent used on the patient is changed, the AG module detects the mixed anesthetic gas during the
transition of two anesthetic agents. The time required for completing the replacement of anesthetic agent depends on
anesthesia type (low flow or high flow) and the characteristics of anesthetic agents (pharmacokinetics). During the
transition of two anesthetic agents, the monitor gives no prompt messages and the MAC value displayed may be
inaccurate.
The AG module can identify two anesthetic agents automatically. When the proportion of the primary and secondary
anesthetic agents in the mixture changes, the AG module can distinguish between them according to their
contributions to the MAC value. Then the primary and secondary anesthetic agents will be exchanged for display.
17-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17.7 Measurement Limitations
The following factors may influence the measurement accuracy:

Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas

Mechanical shock

Cyclic pressure up to 10 kPa (100 cmH2O)

Other sources of interference, if any
17.8 Troubleshooting
17.8.1 When the Gas Inlet is Blocked
If the gas inlet (including watertrap, sampling line and airway adapter) is occluded by condensed water, the message
[AG Airway Occluded] appears.
To remove the occlusion:

Check the airway adapter for an occlusion and replace if necessary.

Check the sampling line for an occlusion or kinking and replace if necessary.

Check the watertrap for a build up of water. Empty the watertrap. If the problem persists, replace the watertrap.
17.8.2 When an Internal Occlusion Occurs
Condensed water may enter the module and cause contamination and/or internal occlusions. In this case, the message
[AG Airway Occluded] displays.
To remove the occlusion:

Check the airway adapter for an occlusion and replace if necessary.

Check the sampling line for an occlusion or kinking and replace if necessary.

Check the watertrap for a build up of water. Empty the watertrap. If the problem persists, replace the watertrap.
17.8.3 When an Internal Occlusion Occurs
Condensed water may enter the module and cause contamination and/or internal occlusions. In this case, the message
[AG Airway Occluded] displays.
To remove the occlusion:

Check for any occlusion in the gas inlet and/or outlet system.

If the problem persists, internal occlusions may exist. Contact your service personnel.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
17-7
17.9 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System
WARNING

Anesthetics: When using the AG measurement on patients who are receiving or have recently received
anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia machine/ventilator, to avoid
exposing medical staff to anesthetics.
To remove the sample gas to a scavenging system, connect an exhaust tube to the gas outlet connector of the module.
17-8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
18 Freezing Waveforms
During patient monitoring, the freeze feature allows you to freeze the currently displayed waveforms on the screen so
that you can have a close examination of the patient’s status. Besides, you can select any frozen waveform for recording.
18.1 Freezing Waveforms
To freeze waveforms, select the [Freeze] hardkey on the monitor’s front panel.

The system closes the displayed menu (if any), and opens the [Freeze] menu.

All displayed waveforms are frozen, i.e. the waveforms stop being refreshed.
NOTE

The freeze feature exerts no effect on the split-screen view of minitrends, OxyCRG and other patients.
18.2 Viewing Frozen Waveforms
To view the frozen waveforms, you can either:

Select the [Scroll] button and then rotate the knob clockwise or counter-clockwise, or

Directly select the
or
beside the [Scroll] button using the touchscreen.
The frozen waveforms will scroll left or right accordingly. And meanwhile, at the lower right corner of the last waveform,
there is an upward arrow. The freeze time displays below the arrow and the initial frozen time is [0 s]. With the
waveforms scrolling, the freeze time changes at intervals of 1 second. This change will be applied for all waveforms on
the screen.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
18-1
18.3 Unfreezing Waveforms
To unfreeze the frozen waveforms, you can either:

Select the

Select the [Freeze] hardkey on the monitor’s front panel, or

Perform any other action that causes the screen to be readjusted or opens a menu, such as inserting or removing a
button at the upper right corner of the [Freeze] menu,
module, pressing the [Menu] hardkey, etc.
18.4 Recording Frozen Waveforms
To record the frozen waveforms:
1.
In the [Freeze] menu, select, in order, [Wave 1], [Wave 2] and [Wave 3] and then select your desired waveforms.
2.
Select the [Record] button. The selected waveforms and all numerics at the frozen time are printed out by the
recorder.
18-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
19 Review
19.1 Accessing Respective Review Windows
1.
Select the [Review] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Review >>].
2.
Select [Graphic Trends], [Tabular Trends], [Events], or [Full Disclosure] to access their respective review
windows.
19.2 Reviewing Graphic Trends
In the [Review] menu, select [Graphic Trends] to access the following window.
1
2
3
4
5
1.
Event mark area
2. Time axis
4.
Parameter area
5. Cursor
3. Graphic trends area
Events are marked with colors in the event mark area. Red represents high level alarm event. Yellow represents
medium/low level alarm event. Green represents manual event.
In this review window:

Select [Trend Group] and you can select a trend group for viewing in the popup menu. If [Custom 1] or [Custom 2]
is selected, you can further select [Define Trend Group]. Then you can select the parameters for viewing in the
popup menu.

Select [Zoom] to set the time length of the review window.

Select [Waves] to set the number of waves displayed in one page.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
19-1

To browse the graphic trends, you can either:

Select
or
beside [Scroll] to move the cursor one step to the left or right to navigate through the
graphic trends, or

Select
or
to move the cursor one page to the left or right to navigate through the graphic
trends.
A time indicating your current position displays above the parameter area. Numeric measurement values
corresponding to the cursor location change as the cursor is moved. The measurement value that triggered a high
level alarm has a red background. The one that triggered a medium/low level alarm has a yellow background.

Select

Select the [Record] button to print the currently displayed graphic trends by the recorder.

Select the [Print] button to set and print the graphic trends report by the printer. For how to set the graphic trends
or
beside [Event] to position the cursor to a different event time.
report, refer to chapter 22 Printing.
19.3 Reviewing Tabular Trends
In the [Review] menu, select [Tabular Trends] to access the following window.
Events are marked with colors in window’s top area. Red represents high level alarm event. Yellow represents
medium/low level alarm event. Green represents manual event.
In this review window:

Select [Trend Group] and you can select a trend group for viewing in the popup menu. If [Custom 1] or [Custom 2]
is selected, you can further select [Define Trend Group]. Then you can select the parameters for viewing in the
popup menu.

19-2
Select [Interval] to change the resolution of the trend data and then select the appropriate setting:
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual

[5 s] or [30 s]: select to view up to 4 hours of tabular trends at 5- or 30-second resolution.

[1 min], [5 min], [10 min], [15 min], [30 min], [1 h], [2 h] or [3 h]: select to view up to 120 hours of tabular
trends at your selected resolution.


[NIBP]: select to view the tabular trends when NIBP measurements were acquired.
To browse the tabular trends, you can either:

Select

Select
or
beside [Scroll] to drag the scrollbar left or right to navigate through the trend database, or
or
to scroll left or right to navigate through the trend database.
The measurement value that triggered a high level alarm has a red background. The one that triggered a medium/low
level alarm has a yellow background.

Select

Select the [Record] button to access the [Record Setup] menu and set the start and end time of the tabular trends
or
beside [Event] to position the cursor to a different event time.
you want to record. This feature is not available when reviewing a patient’s history. By further selecting [Record],
you can print the displayed tabular trends with the recorder.

Select the [Print] button to set and print the tabular trends report with the printer. For how to configure the tabular
trends report, refer to chapter 22 Printing.
19.4 Reviewing Events
19.4.1 Marking Events
During monitoring, some events may affect the patient and change the displayed waveforms or numerics displayed on
the monitor. To help analyze these waveforms or numeric changes, you can mark these events.
Select [Main Menu]→[Mark Event >>]. In the popup menu, you can select the waves to store after triggering a manual
event. You can select [Trigger Manual Event] from the [Mark Event] menu or the [Manual Event] QuickKey to trigger a
manual event and store it at the same time.
When you are reviewing graphic trends, tabular trends or full-disclosure waveforms, the manual event symbol is
displayed at the time the event is triggered.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
19-3
19.4.2 Reviewing Events
The monitor saves the events in real time. You can review these events.
In the [Review] menu, select [Events] to access the following window.
You can review the parameter alarm events, arrhythmia alarm events and manual events. When an event occurs, the
system stores all the measurement numerics at the event triggering time and related waveforms 4 seconds, 8 seconds,
or 16 seconds before and after the event triggering time, as per the setting of recording length.
NOTE

Pausing or switching off alarms will not be recorded as events. The time of these operations will not be
recorded in the system log.

Earlier-recorded events might be overwritten by later ones if the events log reaches capacity.
In this window:

Select [Event] to view the desired events.

Selecting [Level] to view the desired events according to the alarm priority .
After selecting the desired event, you can select [Details] to access the following window. In this window, the waveform
area displays the waveforms related to the event, and the parameter area displays the parameter values happened at the
event trigger time.
NOTE

19-4
A total loss of power has no impact on the saved events.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1
2
1. Waveform area
2. Parameter area
In this window:

You can select
or
to navigate through the waveforms.

You can select
or
beside the [Event] button to switch between events.

You can set the desired [Gain] for ECG waveform.

You can set the desired [Sweep].

By selecting the [Record] button, you can print the displayed alarm events with the recorder.

Select [Print] to print the displayed alarm event to the pre-connected laser printer.

Select [Events List] to view the events list.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
19-5
19.5 Reviewing Waveforms
In the [Review] menu, select [Full Disclosure] to access the following window.
In this review window:

To review full-disclosure waveforms, you need to save waveforms first. Select [Save Waves >>] and then select the
parameters whose waveforms you want to view. To save full-disclosure waveforms, your monitor must have a
storage card.

To view the waveforms, you can either:

Select
or
beside the [Scroll] button to move the cursor one step left or right to navigate through the
waveforms, or

Select
or
to move the cursor one page left or right to navigate through the waveforms.
A time indicating your current position is displayed at the top of the waveform area. Numeric measurement values
corresponding to the cursor location are displayed in the parameter area, and change as the cursor is moved.

You can change the ECG wave gain by selecting [Gain] and then selecting the appropriate setting.

You can change the waveform sweep speed by selecting [Sweep] and then selecting the appropriate setting.

By selecting the [Record] button, you can print out the first three waveforms and measurement numerics by the
recorder.

19-6
By selecting
or
beside the [Event] button, you can position the cursor between events.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
20 Calculations
20.1 Introduction
The calculation feature is available with your monitor. The calculated values, which are not directly measured, are
computed based on the values you provide.
Your can perform the following calculations:

Dose calculations

Oxygenation calculations

Ventilation calculations

Hemodynamic calculations

Renal calculations
To perform a calculation, select [Main Menu] → [Calc >>], or the [Calculations] QuickKey and then select the
calculation you want to perform.
WARNING

After the calculation is finished, verify the entered values are correct and the calculated values are
appropriate. We assume no responsibility for any consequences caused by wrong entries and improper
operations.
NOTE

The calculation feature is independent of other monitoring functions and can be therefore used for patients
being monitored by other monitors. Any operation in a calculation window does not affect the patient
monitoring by the local monitor.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
20-1
20.2 Dose Calculations
20.2.1 Performing Calculations
To perform a dose calculation:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Calc >>]→[Dose >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey→[Dose >>].
2.
Select [Patient Cat.] and [Drug Name] and then select the appropriate settings. The dose calculation program
has a library of commonly used drugs, of which Drug A through Drug E are for those not specified in this library.
3.

Drug A, B, C, D, E

Isuprel

Aminophylline

Lidocaine

Dobutamine

Nipride

Dopamine

NItroglycerin

Epinephrine

Pitocin

Heparin
The system gives a set of default values when the above steps are finished. However, these values cannot be
used as the calculated values. The user must enter values following the doctor’s instructions, and only then can
the calculated values be used
4.
Enter the patient’s weight.
5.
Enter other values.
6.
Verify if the calculated values are correct.
20.2.2 Selecting the Proper Drug Unit
Each drug has its fixed unit or unit series. Among a unit series, one unit may change to another automatically
depending on the entered value.
The units for each drug are as follows:

Drug A, B, C, Aminophylline, Dobutamine, Dopamine, Epinephrine, Isuprel, Lidocaine, Nipride and NItroglycerin
use the unit series: g, mg and mcg.

Drug D, Heparin and Pitocin use the unit series: Unit, KU (kilo units) and MU (million units).

Drug E uses the unit: mEq (milli-equivalents).
You must select the proper drug name (A, B, C, D or E) according to the units when you define a drug not listed in this
library.
NOTE

20-2
For neonate patients, [Drip Rate] and [Drop Size] are disabled.
Passport 12/Passport 8
20.2.3 Titration Table
To open the titration table, select [Titration Table >>] in the [Dose Calculation] window after the dose calculation is
finished.
In the titration table, when you change:

[Reference]

[Interval]

[Dose Type]
The titrated values change accordingly.
You can also:

Select

Select [Record] to print the displayed titrated values by the recorder.
or
, or
or
beside the vertical scrollbar to view more values.
20.2.4 Drug Calculation Formulas
Abbreviation
Unit
Formula
Conc.
g/ml, unit/ml or mEq/ml
Amount / Volume
Dose
Dose/hr, Dose/kg/min
Rate × Conc.
Volume
ml
Rate × Duration
Amount
g, unit, mEq
Rate × Duration
Duration
h
Amount/Dose
Drip Rate
gtt/min
INF Rate × Drop Size / 60
20.3 Oxygenation Calculations
20.3.1 Performing Calculations
To perform an oxygenation calculation:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Calc >>]→[Oxygenation >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey→[Oxygenation >>].
2.
Enter values for calculation.
3.
Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the
calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to
view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
20-3
In the [Oxygenation Calculation] window, you can:

Change the pressure unit, Hb unit and oxygen content unit by selecting [Press. Unit], [Hb Unit] and [OxyCont
Unit] and then selecting the appropriate settings. The changes take effect automatically.

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The displayed oxygenation calculations are printed out by
the recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].
20.3.2 Entered Parameters
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
C.O.
L/min
cardiac output
FiO2
%
percentage fraction of inspired oxygen
PaO2
mmHg
partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries
PaCO2
mmHg
partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries
SaO2
%
arterial oxygen saturation
PvO2
mmHg
partial pressure of oxygen in venous blood
SvO2
%
venous oxygen saturation
Hb
g/L
hemoglobin
CaO2
ml/L
arterial oxygen content
CvO2
ml/L
venous oxygen content
VO2
ml/min
oxygen consumption
RQ
None
respiratory quotient
ATMP
mmHg
atmospheric pressure
Height
cm
height
Weight
kg
weight
20.3.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
Formula
BSA
m
body surface area
Wt 0.425 × Ht 0.725 × 0.007184
VO2 calc
ml/min
oxygen consumption
C(a-v)O2× C.O.
C(a-v)O2
ml/L
arteriovenous oxygen content difference
CaO2 - CvO2
O2ER
%
oxygen extraction ratio
100×C(a-v)O2/ CaO2
DO2
ml/min
oxygen transport
C.O. × CaO2
PAO2
mmHg
partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli
FiO2 / 100 × (ATMP-47)-PaCO2 ×[ FiO2 /100
AaDO2
mmHg
alveolar-arterial oxygen difference
PAO2 - PaO2
CcO2
ml/L
capillary oxygen content
Hb × 1.34 + 0.031 × PAO2
venous admixture
100× [1.34 × Hb × (1-SaO2 /100) + 0.031×
Qs/Qt
2
+ (1-FiO2 /100) / RQ ]
%
(PAO2 -PaO2)] / [1.34 × Hb × (1-SvO2 /100)
+ 0.031× (PAO2 - PvO2 )]
C.O. calc
20-4
L/min
calculated cardiac output
VO2 / (CaO2 - CvO2 )
Passport 12/Passport 8
20.4 Ventilation Calculations
20.4.1 Performing Calculations
To perform a ventilation calculation:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Calc >>]→[Ventilation >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey→[Ventilation >>].
2.
Enter values for calculation. If the monitor is connected to an anesthesia machine or a ventilator, the system
automatically loads the supported parameter values to the [Ventilation Calculation] window.
3.
Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the
calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to
view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].
In the [Ventilation Calculation] window, you can:

Change the pressure unit by selecting [Press. Unit] and then selecting the appropriate setting. Corresponding
pressure values shall convert and update automatically.

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The displayed ventilation calculations are printed out by
the recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].
20.4.2 Entered Parameters
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
FiO2
%
percentage fraction of inspired oxygen
RR
rpm
respiration rate
PeCO2
mmHg
partial pressure of mixed expiratory CO2
PaCO2
mmHg
partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries
PaO2
mmHg
partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries
TV
ml
tidal volume
RQ
None
respiratory quotient
ATMP
mmHg
atmospheric pressure
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
20-5
20.4.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
Formula
PAO2
mmHg
partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli
AaDO2
mmHg
alveolar-arterial oxygen difference
PAO2 - PaO2
Pa/FiO2
mmHg
oxygenation ratio
100 × PaO2 / FiO2
a/AO2
%
arterial to alveolar oxygen ratio
100 × PaO2 / PAO2
MV
L/min
minute volume
(TV × RR) / 1000
Vd
ml
volume of physiological dead space
TV × (1 - PeCO2 / PaCO2)
Vd/Vt
%
physiologic dead space in percent of tidal volume
100 × Vd/TV
VA
L/min
alveolar volume
(TV- Vd) × RR / 1000
(ATMP-47) × FiO2 /100 -PaCO2 ×
[FiO2 /100 + (1-FiO2 /100) / RQ ]
20.5 Hemodynamic Calculations
20.5.1 Performing Calculations
To perform a hemodynamic calculation:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Calc >>]→[Hemodynamic >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey→[Hemodynamic >>].
2.
Enter values for calculation.

For a monitored patient, [HR], [Art mean], [PA mean] and [CVP] are automatically taken from the currently
measured values. If you have just performed C.O. measurements, [C.O.] is the average of multiple
thermodilution measurements. [Height] and [Weight] are the patient’s height and weight you have entered.
If the monitor does not provide these values, their fields are blank.

3.
For an unmonitored patient, confirm the entered values.
Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the
calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to
view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].
In the [Hemodynamic Calculation] window, you can:

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The currently displayed hemodynamic calculations are
printed out by the recorder.

20-6
Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].
Passport 12/Passport 8
20.5.2 Entered Parameters
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
C.O.
L/min
cardiac output
HR
bpm
heart rate
PAWP
mmHg
pulmonary artery wedge pressure
Art Mean
mmHg
artery mean pressure
PA Mean
mmHg
pulmonary artery mean pressure
CVP
mmHg
central venous pressure
EDV
ml
end-diastolic volume
Height
cm
height
Weight
kg
weight
20.5.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
Formula
BSA
m2
body surface area
Wt 0.425 × Ht 0.725 × 0.007184
C.I.
L/min/m2
cardiac index
C.O. / BSA
SV
ml
stroke volume
C.O. / HR × 1000
SI
ml/m2
stroke index
SV/ BSA
SVR
DS/cm
systemic vascular resistance
79.96 × (AP MAP - CVP) / C.O.
SVRI
DS·m /cm
systemic vascular resistance index
SVR × BSA
PVR
DS/cm
pulmonary vascular resistance
79.96 × (PAMAP - PAWP) / C.O.
PVRI
DS·m /cm
pulmonary vascular resistance index
PVR × BSA
LCW
kg·m
left cardiac work
0.0136 × APMAP × C.O.
LCWI
kg·m/m
left cardiac work index
LCW / BSA
LVSW
g·m
left ventricular stroke work
0.0136 × APMAP× SV
LVSWI
g·m/m
left ventricular stroke work index
LVSW / BSA
RCW
kg·m
right cardiac work
0.0136 × PAMAP × C.O.
RCWI
kg·m/m
right cardiac work index
RCW / BSA
RVSW
g·m
right ventricular stroke work
0.0136 × PAMAP × SV
RVSWI
g·m/m
right ventricular stroke work index
RVSW / BSA
EF
%
ejection fraction
100 × SV / EDV
5
2
5
5
2
5
2
2
2
2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
20-7
20.6 Renal Calculations
20.6.1 Performing Calculations
To perform a renal calculation:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Calc >>]→[Renal >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey→[Renal >>].
2.
Enter values for calculation.
3.
Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the
calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to
view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].
In the [Renal Calculation] window, you can:

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The displayed renal calculations are printed by the
recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].
20.6.2 Entered Parameters
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
URK
mmol/L
urine pstassium
URNa
mmol/L
urinary sodium
Urine
ml/24h
urine
Posm
mOsm/ kgH2O
plasm osmolality
Uosm
mOsm/ kgH2O
urine osmolality
SerNa
mmol/L
serum sodium
Cr
µmol/L
creatinine
UCr
µmol/L
urine creatinine
BUN
mmol/L
blood urea nitrogen
Height
cm
height
Weight
kg
weight
20-8
Passport 12/Passport 8
20.6.3 Calculated Parameters and Formulas
Abbreviation
Unit
Full spelling
Formula
URNaEx
mmol/24h
urine sodium excretion
Urine × URNa / 1000
URKEx
mmol/24h
urine potassium excretion
Urine × URK / 1000
Na/K
%
sodium potassium ratio
100 × URNa / URK
CNa
ml/24h
clearance of sodium
URNa × Urine / SerNa
Clcr
ml/min
creatinine clearance rate
Ucr × Urine / Cr / (BSA / 1.73) / 1440
FENa
%
fractional excretion of sodium
100 × (URNa × Cr ) / (SerNa × Ucr)
Cosm
ml/min
osmolar clearance
Uosm × Urine / Posm / 1440
CH2O
ml/h
free water clearance
Urine × (1-Uosm / Posm) / 24
U/P osm
None
urine to plasma osmolality ratio
Uosm / Posm
BUN/Cr
None*
blood urea nitrogen creatinine ratio
1000 × BUN / Cr
U/Cr
None
urine-serum creatinine ratio
Ucr / Cr
*: BUN/Cr is a ratio under the unit of mol.
20.7 Understanding the Review Window
With the review feature, you can review oxygenation, ventilation, hemodynamic and renal calculations. The review
window for each calculation is similar. Take the hemodynamic calculations review window for example, you can access
it by selecting [Review] in the [Hemodynamic Calculation] window.
In this review window:

You can select

The values that exceed the range are displayed in a yellow background. The [Unit] field displays parameter units.
,
or
to view more values.
If some parameter values are outside of their normal ranges, you can view their normal range in the [Unit] field
by selecting [Range].

You can review an individual calculation by selecting its corresponding column and then selecting [Original
Calc]. You can record the currently displayed calculations or perform another calculation is this window.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
20-9
FOR YOUR NOTES
20-10
Passport 12/Passport 8
21 Recording
21.1 Using a Recorder
The thermal recorder prints patient information, measurement numeric and waveforms, etc.
1
2
4
3
5
1.
Start/Stop key: press to start a recording or stop the current recording.
2.
Indicator

On: when the recorder works correctly.

Off: when the monitor is switched off.

Flashes: if an error occurred to the recorder, e.g., the recorder runs out of paper.
3.
Paper outlet
4.
Latch
5.
Recorder door
21.2 Overview of Recording Types
By the way recordings are triggered, the recordings can be classified into the following categories:

Manually-triggered realtime recordings.

Timed recordings.

Alarm recordings triggered by an alarm limit violation or an arrhythmia event.

Manually-triggered, task-related recordings.
NOTE

For details about alarm recording, refer to the chapter 7 Alarms.

For details about task-related recordings, refer to respective sections of this manual.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
21-1
21.3 Starting and Stopping Recordings
To manually start a recording, you can either:

Press the [Record] hardkey on the front of the monitor,

Select the

Select the [Record] button from the current menu or window.
hardkey on the front of the recorder module, or
Automatic recordings will be triggered in the following conditions:

Timed recordings will start automatically at preset intervals.

If both [Alarm] and [Alm Rec] for a measurement are set on, an alarm recording will be triggered automatically as
alarms occur.
To manually stop a recording, you can either:

Press the [Record] or

Select [Clear All Tasks] in the [Record Setup] menu.
hardkey again, or
Recordings stop automatically when:

A recording is completed.

The recorder runs out of paper.

When the recorder has an alarm condition.
When a recording is stopped, the following markers will be added:

Automatically stopped recording: prints two columns of ‘*’ at the end of the report.

Manually or abnormally stopped recording: prints one column of ‘*’ at the end of the report.
21.4 Setting up the Recorder
21.4.1 Accessing the Record Setup Menu
By selecting [Main Menu]→[Record Setup >>], you can access the [Record Setup] menu.
21.4.2 Selecting Waveforms for Recording
The recorder can record up to 3 waveforms at a time. You can select, in order, [Waveform 1], [Waveform 2] and
[Waveform 3] in the [Record Setup] menu, and then select the waveforms you want. You can also turn off a waveform
recording by selecting [Off]. These settings are intended for realtime and scheduled recordings.
21-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
21.4.3 Setting the Realtime Recording Length
After starting a realtime recording, the recording time depends on your monitor’s settings. In the [Record Setup] menu,
select [Length] and then select [8 s] or [Continuous].

[8 s]: record 4-second waveforms respectively before and after current moment.

[Continuous]: record the waveforms from the current moment until stopped manually.
21.4.4 Setting the Interval between Timed Recordings
Timed recordings start automatically at preset intervals. Each recording lasts 8 seconds. To set the interval between
timed recordings: in the [Record Setup] menu, select [Interval] and then select the appropriate setting.
21.4.5 Changing the Recording Speed
In the [Record Setup] menu, select [Paper Speed] and then select [25 mm/s] or [50 mm/s]. This setting is for all
recordings containing waveforms.
21.4.6 Clearing Recording Tasks
In the [Record Setup] menu, select [Clear All Tasks]. All queued recording tasks are cleared and the current recording is
stopped.
21.5 Loading Paper
1.
Press the latch in the upper right corner of the recorder door to open it.
2.
Insert a new roll into the compartment as shown below.
3.
Close the recorder door.
4.
Check if paper is loaded correctly and the paper end is feeding from the top.
Paper roll
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
21-3
CAUTION

Use only specified thermal paper. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the recorder’s printhead, the recorder
may be unable to print, or poor print quality may result.

Never pull the recorder paper with force when a recording is in process. Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the recorder.

Do not leave the recorder door open unless you are reloading paper or resolving an issue.
21.6 Removing Paper Jam
If the recorder works incorrectly or produces unusual sounds, check if there is a paper jam first. If a paper jam is detected,
follow this procedure to remove it:
1.
Open the recorder door.
2.
Take out the paper and tear off the draped part.
3.
Reload the paper and close the recorder door.
21.7 Cleaning the Recorder Printhead
If the recorder has been used for a long time, deposits of paper debris may collect on the printhead compromising the
print quality and shortening the lifetime of the roller. Follow this procedure to clean the printhead:
1.
Take measures against the static electricity such as Disposable Wrist Strap for the work.
2.
Open the recorder door and take out the paper.
3.
Gently wipe around the printhead using cotton swabs dampened with alcohol.
4.
After the alcohol has completely dried, reload the paper and close the recorder door.
CAUTION
21-4

Do not use anything that may destroy the thermal element.

Do not add unnecessary force to the thermal head.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
22 Printing
22.1 Printer
The monitor can output patient reports via a connected printer. The monitor supports the following printer:

HP LaserJet 1505n

HP LaserJet P2035n

HP LaserJet P4015n

HP LaserJet Pro 400 M401n401dn

HP LaserJet 600 M602
The reports specifications are:

Paper: A4, Letter

Resolution: 300 dpi
For more details about the printer, see the document accompanying the printer. With product upgrades, the monitor
may support more printers without prior notice will be given. If you have any questions or doubt about your printer,
contact our company.
22.2 Connecting a printer
To print the reports or the trend data of a patient, you can choose either:

the local printer
Connect the printer and the monitor directly with a network cable, and then start printing what you want.

the CMS
If your monitor is connected to a CMS, it is recommended to use the CMS for printing.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
22-1
22.3 Setting Up the Printer
To set the printer’s properties, select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Printer Setup >>]. In the [Printer Setup] menu,
you can:

Select a connected printer.
Select [Printer] and then select a connected printer as the monitor’s printer.
NOTE

If [Panorama] is selected in [Factory Maintenance], the [Central Station] option appears in the [Printer]
drop-down list automatically. Select the option, and then you can print real-time waveforms, graphic and
tabular trends displaying on the screen of Panorama Central Station for the patient.

Search for a printer.
If your selected printer is not in the list or a new printer is added into the network, you can select the [Search
Printer] to re-search for all printers in the network.

Set up the paper.
Select [Paper Size] and and select [A4] or [Letter].
22.4 Starting Report Printouts
Reports
Contents
Procedures
ECG reports
ECG waveforms and relevant
Select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[ECG Reports >>]→
parameter values
[Print]
Depends on the selected parameter
Select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Tabular Trends
group, resolution and time period
Reports >>]→[Print], or select [Main Menu]→[Review >>]→
Tabular trends
[Tabular Trends]→[Print]→[Print]
Graphic trends
Depends on the selected parameter
Select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Graphic Trends
group, resolution and time period
Reports >>]→[Print], or select [Main Menu]→[Review >>]→
[Graphic Trends]→[Print]→[Print]
Select [Print] in [Arrh. Events]
Arrh. alarm
ECG waveforms and relevant
review
parameter values
Parameter alarm
Depends on the selected alarms
Select [Main Menu]→[Review >>]→[Alarms]→[Print]
Depends on the selected waveforms
Select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Realtime Reports >>]
review
Realtime waves
→[Print]
22-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
22.5 Stopping Report Printouts
To stop report printouts, select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Stop All Reports].
22.6 Setting Up Reports
22.6.1 Setting Up ECG Reports
You can print ECG reports only from the full-screen or half-screen. To set up ECG reports, select [Main Menu]→[Print
Setup >>]→[ECG Reports >>].

[Amplitude]: set the amplitude of the ECG waveforms.

[Sweep]: set the wave print speed to 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s.

[Auto Interval]: if [Auto Interval] is set to [On], the system will automatically adjust the space between waveforms
to avoid overlapping.

[Gridlines]: choose whether to show gridlines.
22.6.2 Setting Up Tabular Trends Reports
To set up tabular trends reports, select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Tabular Trends Reports >>].

[Start time]: you can set a time period whose trend data will be printed out by setting [From] and [Back]. For
example, if you set [From] as 2007-4-2 10:00:00 and [Back] as [2 h], the outputted data will be from 2014-4-2
08:00:00 to 2014-4-2 10:00:00. In addition, the [Back] can be set to either:

[Auto]: if [Report Layout] is set to [Time Oriented], the report will be printed by time. If [Report Layout] is set
to [Parameter Oriented], the report will be printed by parameter.

[All]: if you select [All], all trend data will be printed out. In this case, there is no need to set [From].

[Interval]: choose the resolution of the tabular trends printed on the report.

[Report Layout]: if you select [Time Oriented], the report will be printed by time. If you select [Parameter
Oriented], the report will be printed by parameter.

[Select Parameter >>]: from the pop-up menu, you can:

[Currently Displayed Trended Parameters]: print the parameter trend data selected from the [Tabular
Trends].

[Standard Parameter Group]: select the standard parameter group for printing.

[Custom]: define a parameter group for printing from the parameters displayed in the lower part of the menu.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
22-3
22.6.3 Setting Up Graphic Trends Reports
To set up graphic trends reports, select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Graphic Trends Reports >>]. Setting up
graphic trends reports is similar with tabular trends reports. Refer to section 22.6.2 Setting Up Tabular Trends Reports for
details.
22.6.4 Setting Up Realtime Reports
To set up realtime reports, select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[Realtime Reports >>].

[Sweep]: set the wave print speed to 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s, or Auto.

[Select Wave >>]: from the pop-up menu, you can:

[Current]: print the currently displayed waves.

[Select Wave]: select the desired waves for printing.
22.7 End Case Reports
ECG reports, tabular trends reports, graphic trends reports, NIBP review reports and realtime reports can be set as end
case reports. When you discharge a patient, the system will automatically print all contents that are set as end case
reports.
For example, to set the ECG report as an end case report:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Print Setup >>]→[ECG Report >>].
2.
Select [End Case Report]→[Set as End Case Report] and then select [Ok] from the pop-up dialog box.
3.
Set as described in section 22.6.1Setting Up ECG Reports.
22.8 Printer Statuses
22.8.1 Printer Out of Paper
When the printer is out of paper, the printer will not print until the paper is replaced. If there are too many print jobs that
are not printed, a printer error may occur. In this case, you need to install paper and then re-send the print request.
Restart the printer if necessary.
To avoid this, ensure that there is enough paper in the printer before sending a print request.
22.8.2 Printer Status Messages
If the monitor prompts that selected printer is not available, check that the printer is switched on, correctly connected,
and installed with paper.
22-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
23 Other Functions
23.1 Analog Output
The monitor provides analog output signals to accessory equipment via the multifunctional connector on the rear of the
monitor.
NOTE

The analog output feature is seldom applied in clinical applications. You can contact your service personnel
for more details.
23.2 Exporting the Log
The monitor stores system status information, including failures, abnormity, and technical alarms, into the log. You can
export the log to a USB disk.
To export the log,
1.
Connect a USB disk to the monitor’s USB connector. See section 2.3.3 Rear View for the proper location of the USB
connector.
2.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→[Others >>].
3.
Select [Export Log].
23.3 Transferring Data
You can transfer the patient data saved in the monitor to a PC via a crossover network cable or within a LAN for data
management, review or print.
23.3.1 Data Export System
You must install the data export system on the intended PC before performing the data transfer operation. Refer to the
document accompanying the installation CD-ROM for installation instructions.
The data transfer feature supports patient management, data review, data format conversion, print, etc. in addition to
data transfer. Refer to the help file of the system software for more details.
Passport 12/Passport 8
23-1
23.3.2 Transferring Data by Different Means
NOTE

Never enter the data transfer mode when the monitor is in normal operation or performs monitoring. You
must re-start the monitor to exit the data transfer mode.
Transfer data via a crossover network cable
Before transferring data using a crossover network cable:
1.
Connect one end of the crossover network cable to the monitor and the other end to the PC.
2.
Set the IP address of the PC. This IP address must be in the same network segment with that of the monitor.
3.
Make sure that the data export system is active on the PC.
Then, follow this procedure to transfer data:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Patient Data >>]→[Transfer Data].
2.
Select [Yes] from the popup message box.
3.
Input the IP address already set on the PC.
4.
Select [Start] to start transferring data.
Transfer data within a LAN
Before transferring data within a LAN:
1.
Connect the monitor and the intended PC into the same LAN and acquire the PC’s IP address.
2.
Make sure that the data export system is active on the PC.
Follow the same procedure as via a crossover network cable to transfer data.
23.4 Nurse Call
The monitor provides a nurse call connector to output nurse call signal when a user-defined alarm occurs. To obtain
nurse call signal, use the nurse call cable (PN: 009-003116-00) we supply to connect the hospital nurse call system to the
nurse call connector of the monitor and then follow this procedure:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.
2.
Select [Others >>] to access the [Others] menu.
3.
Select [Nurse Call Setup >>] to change the nurse call settings as follows:

Select [Signal Type] and then select [Pulse] or [Continuous].

[Pulse]: the nurse call signal is a pulse signal and each pulse lasts one second. When multiple alarms occur
simultaneously, only one pulse signal is outputted. If an alarm occurs but the previous one is not cleared, a
new pulse signal will also be outputted.

[Continuous]: the nurse call signal lasts until the alarm ends, i.e. the duration of a nurse call signal is equal to
that of the alarm condition.
23-2
Passport 12/Passport 8

Select [Contact Type] and then select [Normally Open] or [Normally Closed].

[Normally Open]: select if your hospital’s nurse call relay contact is normally open.

[Normally Closed]: select if your hospital’s nurse call relay contact is normally closed.

Select [Alm Lev] and set the alarm level for nurse call-triggering alarms.

Select [Alarm Cat.] and then select the category to which the nurse call-triggering alarms belong.
Alarm conditions are indicated to nurses only when:

The nurse call system is enabled,

An alarm that meets your preset requirements occurs, and

The monitor is not in the alarm paused or silence status.
WARNING

To obtain the nurse call signal, use the nurse call cable (PN: 009-003116-00) we supply. Otherwise the nurse
call function will not work and the monitor may be damaged.

Do not rely exclusively on the nurse call system for alarm notification. Remember that the most reliable
alarm notification combines audible and visual alarm indications with the patient’s clinical condition.
NOTE

If no setting is selected from [Alm Lev] or [Alarm Cat.], no nurse call signal will be triggered whatever alarms
occur.
23.5 Network Connection
CAUTION

Disconnecting from the network may result in loss of data, including parameter waveforms and
measurements, alarm events, trends and patient data, or cause function failure. In case of network
disconnection, check the patient and solve the network problem as soon as possible.
23.5.1 Setting the Network Type
The monitor supports both wired and wireless network. To set the network type, you can select [Main Menu]→
[Maintenance>>]→[User Maintenance>>]→enter the required password→[Network Setup >>].
Passport 12/Passport 8
23-3
23.5.2 Setting up the Wireless Network
A Mindray proprietary wireless network, installed by approved Mindray service personnel, is required to support wireless
networking.
This proprietary network will have the following capabilities:

Support the 802.11g wireless protocol

Have a channel bandwidth of 20 MHz

Support WPA2-PSK security

Provide a signal strength at the monitor of no less than -65 dBm
NOTE

Keep network authentication information (e.g, password) safe to protect the network from being accessed
by unauthorized users.

Authentication and encryption other than WPA2-PSK may expose sensitive data leak or malicious setting.

The total throughput of all the wireless devices connected to the wireless network should be less than the
effective transmitting capability of the wireless network. The throughput capacity of a single Passport 8 is
729 kbps and a single Passport 12 is 747 kbps.

Do not connect non-medical devices to the wireless network.

Where the monitor is located, the signal strength of other Wi-Fi devices on the same channel should be no
greater than -85 dBm.

Where the monitor is located, the signal strength of other Wi-Fi devices on adjacent channels should be no
greater than -50 dBm.

The recommended distance between the patient monitor and other non-Wi-Fi wireless devices, including
wireless devices at the frequency of 2.4GHz (e.g. cellular mobile communication networks, microwave
ovens, interphones, cordless phones and electro-surgical units) is no less than 20 cm.
23.6 Setting the CMS
You can configure up to 30 CMSs for your monitor. To set the CMSs,
1
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance>>]→[User Maintenance>>]→enter the required password.→[Network
Setup >>]→[Central Station Setup >>].
2.
23-4
Set CMS names and corresponding IP addresses.
Passport 12/Passport 8
23.6.1 Selecting a CMS
If [Select CMS] is enabled, you can select the CMS for the current monitoring.
To select the CMS, select the prompt message area at the bottom of the screen. Then the selected CMS name will
display.
If no CMS is selected, this area displays “???”.
23.6.2 Clearing the Selected CMS at Startup
You can clear the selected CMS each time the monitor restarts after being powered off for more than 2 minutes.
To clear the selected CMS:
1
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance>>]→[User Maintenance>>]→enter the required password→[Others >>].
2.
Set [Clear CMS IP at startup] to [On]
The selected CMS will not be cleared when only one CMS is configured, or the monitor is restarted within 2 minutes.
This function is switched off by default.
23.7 Setting the Multicast Parameters
To set the Multicast parameters:
1
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance>>]→[User Maintenance>>]→enter the required password.→[Network
Setup >>]→[Multicast Setup >>].
2.
Set [Multicast Addr] and [TTL].
3.
Select [Ok] to save the setting.
Passport 12/Passport 8
23-5
FOR YOUR NOTES
23-6
Passport 12/Passport 8
24 Batteries
24.1 Overview
This monitor is designed to operate from rechargeable Lithium-ion battery power when AC power is not available. If
the AC power is interrupted during patient monitoring, the monitor automatically runs from the battery. The Passport
12 patient monitor is capable of storing up to two batteries. The Passport 8 patient monitor is capable of storing one
battery.
NOTE

It is recommended to always install a fully charged battery in the monitor to ensure normal monitoring in
case of accidental power failure.
On-screen battery symbols indicate the battery status as follows:
Indicates that the battery works correctly. The solid portion represents the current charge level of

the battery in proportion to its maximum charge level.
Indicates that the battery has low charge level and needs to be charged.

Indicates that the battery is almost depleted and needs to be charged immediately. Otherwise, the

monitor shuts down automatically.

Indicates that no battery is installed.
The capacity of the battery is limited. When the battery is low, the technical alarm area displays [Low Battery], the
alarm lamp flashes, and monitor produces an alarm sound.
If the battery is depleted, the battery symbol on the screen flashes, the technical alarm area displays [Battery
Depleted], the alarm lamp flashes, and the monitor produces alarm sound. Connect the equipment to AC mains to
run the equipment and charge the battery. Otherwise the equipment will shut down.
24.2 Charging a Battery
The battery is charged whenever the monitor is connected to an AC power source regardless of whether or not the
monitor is turned on. When the battery is charging, the AC power indicator and battery indicator are both on. If the
monitor is powered on, the battery status symbol on the monitor screen displays
when the charging is
complete.
Passport 12/Passport 8
24-1
24.3 Replacing a Battery
When the Passport 12 patient monitor uses two battery packs, one battery pack can be easily exchanged while the
monitor operates from the other. If the Passport 12 patient monitor uses one battery pack, you should insert a new
battery pack before the old one depletes.
When the Passport 8 patient monitor operates on battery power, make sure the monitor is powered off before
replacing a battery.
To replace a battery, follow this procedure:
1.
Open the battery door.
Pull here to open
the battery door
Passport 12
Passport 8
2.
Push aside the latch fixing the battery to be replaced and remove the battery.
3.
Insert a battery into the slot with its contact pointed inward.
4.
Close the battery door.
24.4 Battery Guidelines
Battery life expectancy depends on how frequent and how long it is used. For a properly maintained and stored
lithium ion battery, its life expectancy is about 3 years. For more aggressive use models, life expectancy can be less. We
recommend replacing lithium ion batteries after 500 full charge/discharge cycles or every 3 years from first use,
whichever occurs first.
To get the most out of the battery, observe the following guidelines:

The battery performance test must be performed every six months, before monitor repairs, or whenever battery
performance is suspect.

Condition the batteries every 3 months, or when its run time becomes noticeably shorter.

Take out the battery before the monitor is shipped or will not be used for more than two weeks.

Remove the battery from the monitor if it is not being used regularly. (Leaving the battery in a monitor that is not
in regular use will shorten the life of the battery).
24-2
Passport 12/Passport 8

The shelf life of a lithium Ion battery is about 6 months when the battery is stored with the battery power being
50% of the total power. In 6 months the battery power must be depleted before the Lithium Ion battery is fully
charged. Then run the monitor on this fully charged battery .When its battery power becomes 50% of the total
power, take out the battery from the monitor and store it.

When storing batteries, make sure that the battery terminals do not come into contact with metallic objects. If
batteries are stored for an extended period of time, they should be placed in a cool place with a partial charge of
40% to 60% capacity.

Storing batteries at a high temperature for an extended period of time will significantly shorten the life
expectancy of a battery. Do not store the battery at a temperature beyond -20 °C - 60 °C (-4°F - 140°F).
CAUTION

Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Use only specified batteries.

Charge the batteries in this monitor.

High ambient temperature shortens battery run time.

Extremely high ambient temperature may activate battery overheat protection, resulting the monitor
powering off.

If the battery shows signs of damage or signs of leakage, replace it immediately. Do not use a faulty battery
in the monitor.

The Lithium-ion batteries have a service life of 3 years. Please replace your battery when it reaches the end
of its service life. Failure to replace the battery may cause serious damage to your device from battery
overheating.
24.5 Battery Maintenance
Conditioning a Battery
A battery should be conditioned before it is used for the first time. A battery conditioning cycle is one uninterrupted
charge of the battery, followed by an uninterrupted battery discharge and charge. Batteries should be conditioned
regularly to maintain their useful life.
NOTE

The battery charge level indicator does not indicate the capacity or operating time of the battery. It only
indicates the current battery charge level. The actual battery capacity decreases over time with the use of
the battery. For an old battery, its capacity and operating time may not fulfill battery specifications even the
battery charge level indicates the battery is in full charge. Please replace the battery if its operating time is
significantly lower than the specified time.
Passport 12/Passport 8
24-3
To condition a battery, follow this procedure:
1.
Disconnect the monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring or measuring.
2.
Insert the battery in need of conditioning in the battery slot of the monitor.
3.
Apply AC power to the monitor and allow the battery to charge uninterrupted for 10 hours.
4.
Remove AC power and allow the monitor to run from the battery until it shuts off.
5.
Apply AC power again to the monitor and allow the battery to charge uninterrupted for 10 hours.
6.
This battery is now conditioned and the monitor can be returned to service.
Checking a Battery
The performance of a rechargeable battery will deteriorate over time. The battery performance test must be
performed every six months, before monitor repairs, or whenever the battery performance is suspected. To check the
performance of a battery, follow this procedure:
1.
Disconnect the monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring or measuring.
2.
Turn off the monitor.
3.
Apply AC power to the monitor and allow the battery to charge uninterrupted for 4 hours.
4.
Remove AC power and allow the monitor to run from the battery until it shuts off.
5.
Record the battery operating time.
The battery operating time directly reflects its performance. If the battery operating time is noticeably shorter than
that stated in the specifications, contact your Mindray service personnel.
NOTE

The battery might be damaged or may have malfunctioned if it only operates for a short time after being
fully charged. The operating time depends on the configuration and operation. For example, measuring
NIBP more frequently will also shorten the operating time.

Replace a battery that has visual signs of damage or no longer holds a charge. Remove the old battery from
the monitor and recycle it according to local laws.
24.6 Battery Recycling
Remove the old battery from the monitor and recycle it properly. Follow local laws for proper battery disposal.
WARNING

Do not disassemble batteries, dispose of them in fire, or cause them to short circuit. They may ignite,
explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
24-4
Passport 12/Passport 8
25 Care and Cleaning
In this chapter we only describe cleaning and disinfection of the main unit. For the cleaning and disinfection of other
reusable accessories, refer to instructions for use of corresponding accessories.
WARNING

Use only Mindray approved cleaners and disinfectants and methods listed in this chapter to clean or
disinfect your equipment. Warranty does not cover damage caused by unapproved substances or methods.

We make no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for controlling
infection. For the method to control infection, consult your hospital’s Infection Control Officer or
Epidemiologist.
CAUTION

The responsible hospital or institution shall carry out all cleaning and disinfection procedures specified in
this chapter.
25.1 General Points
Keep your equipment and accessories clean. To avoid damage to the equipment, follow these guidelines:

Always dilute cleaners and disinfectants according the manufacturer’s instructions or use lowest possible
concentration.

Do not immerse part of the equipment into liquid.

Do not pour liquid onto the equipment or accessories.

Do not allow liquid to enter the case.

Never use abrasive materials (such as steel wool or silver polish), or erosive cleaners (such as acetone or
acetone-based cleaners).
WARNING

Be sure to turn off the system and disconnect all power cables from the outlets before cleaning the
equipment.
CAUTION

If you spill liquid on the equipment or accessories, contact Mindray or your service personnel.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
25-1
NOTE

To clean or disinfect reusable accessories, refer to the instructions delivered with the accessories.
25.2 Cleaning
Your equipment should be cleaned on a regular basis. Before cleaning the equipment, consult your hospital’s
regulations for cleaning the equipment.
Recommended cleaning agents are:

Sodium hypochlorite bleach (10%)

Hydrogen peroxide (3%)

Ethanol (70%)

Isopropanol (70%)
To clean your equipment, follow these rules:
1.
Shut down the monitor and disconnect it from AC power.
2.
Clean the display screen using a soft, clean cloth dampened with a cleaning agent.
3.
Clean the exterior surface of the equipment using a soft cloth dampened with a cleaning agent.
4.
Wipe off all the cleaning solution with a dry cloth after cleaning if necessary.
5.
Dry your equipment in a ventilated, cool place.
25.3 Disinfecting
Disinfect the monitor as required in your hospital’s servicing schedule. Cleaning equipment before disinfecting is
recommended.
The recommended disinfectants include:

Isopropanol 70%

Ethanol (70%)

Perform® classic concentrate OXY (KHSO4 solution).
CAUTION

Never use EtO or formaldehyde for disinfection.
25.4 Sterilization
Sterilization is not recommended for this equipment, related products, accessories, or supplies unless otherwise
indicated in the Instructions for Use that accompany the products, accessories or supplies.
25-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
26 User Maintenance
CAUTION

Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution using this equipment to implement a
recommended maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure and possible health hazards.

The safety checks or maintenance involving any disassembly of the equipment should be performed by
professional servicing personnel. Otherwise, undue equipment failure and possible health hazards could
result.

No modification of this equipment is allowed.

Do not open the equipment housings. All servicing and future upgrades must be carried out by the
personnel trained and authorized by Mindray only.

If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel or Mindray.

The service personnel must be properly qualified and thoroughly familiar with the operation of the
equipment.
26.1 General Inspection
A thorough inspection should be performed by qualified service personnel to ensure the reliability before first use, after
your monitor has been used for 6 to 12 months, or whenever your monitor is repaired or updated.
Follow these guidelines when inspecting the equipment:

Make sure that the environment and power supply meet the specifications.

Inspect the equipment and its accessories for mechanical damage.

Inspect all power cords for damage, and make sure that their insulation is in good condition.

Make sure that only specified accessories are applied.

Inspect if the alarm system functions correctly.

Make sure that the recorder functions correctly and the recorder paper meets the specifications.

Make sure that the batteries meet the performance specifications.

Make sure that the monitor is in good working condition.
In case of any damage or abnormity, do not use the monitor. Contact the hospital’s biomedical engineers or your service
personnel immediately.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
26-1
26.2 Maintenance and Testing Schedule
The following maintenance and tests, except for visual inspection, power on test, touchscreen calibration, battery check,
ECG calibration, NIBP leakage, CO2 leakage, and AG leakage, should be carried out by the service personnel only. Ensure
the monitor is safety and performance tested by qualified service personnel before initial installation, after repair or
upgrade, or during regularly scheduled maintenance. Contact your service personnel if any maintenance is required.
Make sure to clean and disinfect the equipment before any test and maintenance.
CAUTION

Changing the settings in [User Settings >>] and [Factory Maintenance >>] menus may cause data loss.

Service personnel should acquaint themselves with the test tools and make sure that the test tools and
cables are applicable.
Check/Maintenance Item
Recommended Frequency
Performance Tests
When first installed or reinstalled.
Visual inspection
ECG test
Performance test
1. If the user suspects that the measurement is incorrect.
Verificvation
2. Following any repairs or replacement of relevant module.
3. At least once every two years.
Resp performance test
SpO2 test
NIBP test
Pressure check
Note: At least once a year is recommended for NIBP, CO2 and AG.
Leakage test
Temp test
IBP test
Performance test
C.O. test
CO2 tests and
calibration
Leakage test
Pressure check
Calibration
Leakage test
AG test
Performance test
Calibration
Nurse call relay performance test
If the user suspects that the analog output does not work well.
Analog output performance test
Electrical Safety Tests
Electrical safety tests
At least once every two years.
Other Tests
1. When first installed or reinstalled.
Power on test
2. Following any maintenance or the replacement of any main unit parts.
1. When the touchscreen appears abnormal.
Touchscreen calibration
2. After the touchscreen is replaced.
Recorder check
Battery check
Following any repair or replacement of the recorder.
Functionality test
Performance test
26-2
1. When first installed.
2. Whenever a battery is replaced.
Once a year or if the battery run time reduced significantly.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
26.3 Checking Monitor and Module Information
To view the information about system start time, selftest, etc., select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[Monitor
Information >>]. You can print out the information for the convenience of troubleshooting. The information will not be
saved during shut down.
You can also view the information about the monitor configuration and system software version by selecting [Main
Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[Software Version >>].
26.4 ECG Verification
The ECG signal may be inaccurate due to hardware or software problems. As a result, the ECG wave amplitude becomes
greater or smaller. In that case, you need to verify the ECG module.
1.
Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area→[Filter]→[Diagnostic].
2.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→[Module
Maintenance >>]→[Calibrate ECG]. A square wave appears on the screen and the message [ECG Calibrating] is
displayed.
3.
Compare the amplitude of the square wave with the wave scale. The difference should be within 5%.
4.
After the calibration is completed, select [Stop Calibrating ECG]
You can print the square wave and wave scale and then measure the difference between them if necessary. If the
difference exceeds 5%, contact your service personnel.
26.5 NIBP Leakage Test
The NIBP leakage test checks the integrity of the system and of the valve. It is required at least once a year or when you
doubt the measured NIBP. If the test failed, corresponding prompt messages will be given. If no message is displayed, it
means no leakage is detected.
Tools required:

An adult cuff

An air tubing

A correct sized cylinder
Follow this procedure to perform the leakage test:
1.
Set the patient category to [Adu].
2.
Connect the cuff to the NIBP connector on the monitor.
3.
Wrap the cuff around the cylinder as shown below.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
26-3
Monitor
Connector for
Cylinder
Air tubing
Cuff
NIBP cuff
4.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]. Enter the required password and then select
[Ok].
5.
Select [Module Maintenance >>]→[NIBP Leakage Test]. The NIBP display shows [Leakage Testing…].
After about 20 seconds, the monitor will automatically deflate. This means the test is completed. If the message [NIBP
Pneumatic Leak] is displayed, it indicates that the NIBP airway may have leakages. Check the tubing and connections
for leakages. If you ensure that the tubing and connections are all correct, perform a leakage test again.
If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.
NOTE

The leakage test is intended for use to simply determine whether there are leakages in the NIBP airway. It is
not the same as that specified in the EN 1060-3 standard.
26.6 CO2 Leakage Test
For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, leakage test is needed every year or when you suspect the measurement.
Follow this procedure to perform the test:
1.
Connect the CO2 module with the patient module.
2.
Wait until CO2 warmup is finished and then use your hand or other objects to completely block the gas inlet of the
module or watertrap. The sidestream and microstream CO2 modules will behave as follows:

Sidestream: The alarm message [CO2 FilterLine Err] is displayed on the screen after certain time. Block the
gas inlet for another 30 s. If the alarm message does not disappear, it indicates that the module does not
leak.

Microstream: The alarm message [CO2 Purging] is displayed on the screen after certain time. Block the gas
inlet for another 30s. If alarm message [CO2 FilterLine Err] is shown, it indicates that the module does not
leak.
26-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
26.7 AG Tests
26.7.1 AG Leakage Test
Follow this procedure to perform the test:
1.
Plug the AG module into the module rack.
2.
Wait until the AG module warmup is finished, and then use your hand or other objects to completely block the gas
inlet of the AG module. An alarm message [AG Airway Occluded] will appear on the screen.
3.
Block the gas inlet for 60 s. Select [Main menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required
password→[Calibrate AG >>], and check that current flow rate is less than 10ml/min.
If the flow rate is less than 10ml/min and the alarm message [AG Airway Occluded] does not disappear, it indicates that
the module does not leak.
If the alarm message does not appear, or the flow rate is greater than or equal to 10ml/min, it indicates that the module
leaks. If the problem remains, contact your service personnel for help.
26.8 Calibrating the Touchscreen
1.
2.
3.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→ [Cal. Touchscreen].
will, in turn, appear at different positions of the screen. Select each
as it appears on the screen.
After the calibration is completed, the message [Screen Calibration Completed!] is displayed. Select [Ok] to
confirm the completion of the calibration.
26.9 Entering/Exiting Demo Mode
To enter the Demo mode:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>].
2.
Select [Demo >>]. Enter the required password and then select [Ok].
To exit the Demo mode:
1.
Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>].
2.
Select [Exit Demo] and then select [Ok].
3.
The monitor exits the Demo mode.
WARNING

The Demo mode is for demonstration purpose only. To avoid the potential risk of the simulated data being
mistaken for the monitored patient's data, do not enter the Demo mode while monitoring a patient.
Otherwise, improper patient monitoring and delayed treatment could occur.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
26-5
FOR YOUR NOTES
26-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
27 Accessories
The accessories listed in this chapter comply with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2 when in use with the patient
monitor. The accessory material that contacts the patients has undertaken the bio-compatibility test and is verified to
be in compliance with ISO 10993-1. For details about the accessories, refer to the instructions for use provided with
the accessory.
WARNING

Use accessories specified in this chapter. Using other accessories may cause damage to the patient monitor
or not meet the claimed specifications.

Single-use accessories are not designed to be reused. Reuse may cause a risk of contamination and affect
the measurement accuracy.
CAUTION

Check the accessories and their packages for any sign of damage. Do not use them if any damage is
detected.

Use the accessories before the expiry date if their expiry date is indicated.

The disposable accessories shall be disposed of according to hospital's regulations.
27.1 ECG Accessories
ECG Electrodes
Model
Quantity
Patient Category
Part No.
31499224
10 pieces
Adult
0010-10-12304
2258-3
3 pieces
Neonate
900E-10-04880
12-Pin Separable Trunk Cables
Leadwire
Compatible with
Type
3-leadwire
AHA, IEC
Defibrillation-proof
3-leadwire
AHA, IEC
ESU-proof
3-leadwire
/
Defibrillation-proof
3/5-leadwire
AHA, IEC
Defibrillation-proof
3/5-leadwire
AHA, IEC
ESU-proof
3/5-leadwire
/
Defibrillation-proof
3/5-leadwire
/
ESU-proof
supported
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Patient Category
Part No.
0010-30-42720
Infant, neonate
0010-30-42724
040-000754-00
Adult, pediatric
Adult, pediatric
0010-30-42719
0010-30-42723
040-001416-00
009-003652-00
27-1
Cable Sets
3-Electrode Cable Sets
Type
Compatible with
Clip
AHA
Snap
AHA
Model
Patient Category
Part No.
Length
Remark
EL6303A
Adult, pediatric
0010-30-42731
1m
Long
EL6305A
Infant, neonate
0010-30-42896
1m
Long
EL6301B
Adult, pediatric
0010-30-42734
1m
Long
EL6311B
Infant, neonate
040-000146-00
1m
Long, disposable
5-Electrode Cable Sets
Type
Clip
Compatible
with
AHA
Model
Patient
Part No.
Length
Remark
/
0012-00-1514-01
0.457m
/
/
0012-00-1514-02
0.61m
/
/
0012-00-1514-03
1.016m
Long
EL6501A
0010-30-42727
0.6m
/
0010-30-42729
1m to 1.4m
Long
0012-00-1503-01
0.457m
/
/
0012-00-1503-02
0.61m
/
/
0012-00-1503-03
1.016m
Long
Category
EL6503A
/
Snap
AHA
Adult, pediatric
1.4m for RL
EL6501B
0010-30-42735
and LL; 1m
Long
for others
27.2 SpO2 Accessories
Extension Cable
Module type
Remarks
Part No.
Masimo
8 pins, purple connector
115-020768-00
Nellcor
8 pins
0010-20-42712
SpO2 Sensors
Masimo SpO2 Module
Type
Disposable
Reusable
27-2
Model
Patient Category
Part No.
LNCS NeoPt
Pediatric, neonate
0600-00-0125
LNCS Neo
Neonate
0600-00-0157
LNCS Inf
Infant
0600-00-0158
LNCS Pdtx
Pediatric
0600-00-0122
LNCS Adtx
Adult
0600-00-0121
LNCS DCI
Adult
0600-00-0126
LNCS DCIP
Pediatric
0600-00-0127
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Wavelength emitted by the sensors is between 600 nm and 1000 nm.
The maximum photic output consumption of the sensor is less than 18 mW.
The information about the wavelength range and maximum photic output consumption can be especially useful to
clinicians (for example, when photodynamic therapy is performed).
27.3 NIBP Accessories
Tubing
Type
Reusable
Patient Category
Part No.
Adult, pediatric, infant
6200-30-09688
Neonate
6200-30-11560
Reusable Cuff
Limb Circumference
Bladder Width
(cm)
(cm)
Large adult (long)
35.5 to 46
/
0683-15-0007-01
/
Adult (long)
27.5 to 36.5
/
0683-15-0006-01
CM1201
Child
10 to 19
9.2
0683-15-0001-01
CM1202
Small adult
18 to 26
12.2
0683-15-0002-01
CM1203
Adult
24 to 35
15.1
0683-15-0003-01
CM1204
Large adult
33 to 47
18.3
0683-15-0004-01
CM1205
Thigh
46 to 66
22.5
0683-15-0005-01
Model
Patient Category
/
Measurement Site
Arm
Thigh
Part No.
Single-Patient Cuff
Model
Patient
Category
Measurement Site
CM1500A
CM1500B
CM1500C
Neonate
CM1500D
Arm
Limb Circumference
Bladder Width
(cm)
(cm)
3.1 to 5.7
2.2
001B-30-70692
4.3 to 8.0
2.9
001B-30-70693
5.8 to 10.9
3.8
001B-30-70694
7.1 to 13.1
4.8
001B-30-70695
10 to 19
7.2
0683-14-0001-01
Part No.
CM1501
Child
CM1502
Small adult
18 to 26
9.8
0683-14-0002-01
CM1503
Adult
25 to 35
13.1
0683-14-0003-01
CM1504
Large adult
33 to 47
16.5
0683-14-0004-01
CM1505
Adult
46 to 66
20.5
0683-14-0005-01
/
/
Thigh
Large adult
(long)
Adult (long)
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
35.5 to 46
0683-14-0007-01
27.5 to 36.5
0683-14-0006-01
27-3
27.4 Temp Accessories
Temp Cable
Type
Model
Remark
Part No.
Extension cable (reusable)
MR420B
Applicable to sensor MR411 and MR412
0011-30-37391
MR421
/
0010-30-43056
TEMP adapter cable (2-pin to
audio)
Temp Probes
Type
Model
MR401B
Reusable
MR403B
MR402B
MR404B
Disposable
MR411
MR412
Patient Category
Adult
Pediatric, infant
Adult, pediatric, infant
Measurement Site
Part No.
Esophageal/Rectal
0011-30-37392
Skin
0011-30-37393
Esophageal/Rectal
0011-30-37394
Skin
0011-30-37395
Esophageal/Rectal
0011-30-37398
Skin
0011-30-37397
27.5 IBP/ICP Accessories
Material
Part No.
IBP adapter cable
0010-30-43055
IBP extended cable with dual-receptacle
040-001029-00
BD IBP Cable, 12 pin
001C-30-70757
Edwards IBP Cable, 12 pin
0010-21-12179
Hospira IBP Cable, 12 pin
001C-30-70759
It is proved through tests that the following accessories are compatible with the patient monitor. Only the accessories
proceeded by “*” are available from our company. If you want to purchase other accessories, contact respective
manufacturers and make sure if these accessories are approved for sale in local.
Manufacturer
Accessories
MX961Z14 Logical Cable, to be used in connection with the Adapter Cable (0010-20-42795)
MX960 Reusable Transducer Kit
Smith Medical
MX261 Logical Clamp For Transducer Bracket
(Medex)
MX262 Logical Clamp For 2 Transducer Mount Plates
MX960E6441 Logical Transducer Mounting Plate
(More Logical Clamps are available from Medex. For detailed information, contact Medex.)
IBP Reusable Cable (REF: 5203511), to be used in connection with the Adapter Cable (0010-20-42795)
Braun
Combitrans Monitoring Set (contact Braun for detailed information)
Combitrans Attachment Plate Holder (REF:5215800)
Combitrans Attachment Plate (contact Braun for detailed information)
27-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Manufacturer
Accessories
*Truck cable (0010-21-43082)
Memscap
SP844 Physiological Pressure Transducer
844-26 Monitoring Line Set
84X-49 Mounting Bracket
Reusable Blood Pressure Monitor Interface Cable (REF: 650-206)
Deltran Disposable Pressure Transducer System
Utah
(More Deltran sensors are available from Utah. For detailed information, contact Utah.)
Pole Mount Unit (ERF: 650-150)
Deltran Three Slot Organizer, Attaches to I.V. Pole Mount (REF: 650-100)
Deltran Four Slot Organizer, Attaches to I.V. Pole Mount (REF: 650-105)
* IBP Truwave Reusable Cable (0010-21-12179)
Pressure Monitoring Kit With Truwave Disposable Pressure Transducer.
Edwards
(More Truwave sensors are available from Edwards. For detailed information, contact Edwards.)
DTSC IV Pole Clamp for Model DTH4 Backplate Holder
DTH4 Disposable Holder for DPT
27.6 C.O. Accessories
Model
Material
Part No.
CO7702
12Pin C.O. cable.
0010-30-42743
SP4042
TI Sensor
6000-10-02079
SP5045
TI Sensor Housing
6000-10-02080
MX387
12CC Control Syringe W/1CC Stop W/Rotator
6000-10-02081
131HF7
Thermodilution catheter
6000-10-02183
9850A
Cable kit with TI Sensor
0012-00-1519
27.7 CO2 Accessories
Sidestream CO2 module
Material
Patient Category
DRYLINE Watertrap
Adult, pediatric
DRYLINE Watertrap
Neonate
Sampling Line Adult 2.5m
Adult, pediatric
9200-10-10533
Sampling Line, Neonate, 2.5m
Neonate
9200-10-10555
Adult Nasal CO2 Sample Cannula
Adult
Pediatric Nasal CO2 Sample Cannula
Pediatric
M02A-10-25938
Infant Nasal CO2 Sample Cannula
Neonate
M02B-10-64509
DRYLINE Airway Adapter
Adult, pediatric
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Remark
Reusable
Disposable
Straight, disposable
Part No.
9200-10-10530
9200-10-10574
M02A-10-25937
9000-10-07486
27-5
27.8 AG Accessories (for Passport 12 only)
Material
Watertrap
Sampling line
Airway adapter
Patient Category
Adult, pediatric
Neonate
Adult, pediatric
Neonate
Remark
Part No.
9200-10-10530
Reusable
9200-10-10574
9200-10-10533
Disposable
9200-10-10555
Adult, pediatric, neonate
Disposable, straight
9000-10-07486
Adult, pediatric, neonate
Disposable, elbow
9000-10-07487
27.9 Others
Material
Part No.
Lithium battery
022-000008-00
U.S. power cord
DA8K-10-14452
DC power line to vehicle (for Passport 8 only)
M03-010089-00
Grounding cable
1000-21-00122
Nurse call cable (≤60W, ≤2A, ≤36VDC, ≤25VAC)
009-003116-00
analog output cable
009-003117-00
Synchronization cable
009-003118-00
LCD display, 17"
0000-10-11284
023-000217-00
USB drive, 4G
023-000218-00
Recorder
TR6F-30-67306
Thermal paper
0683-00-0505-01
Wall mount bracket for external display
0010-30-42956
Bedrail Hook subassembly (Passport 12)
115-012698-00
Bedrail Hook subassembly (Passport 8)
115-012697-00
Transition Plate Kit for rolling stand and wall mount
115-012695-00
Data output package (CD, Cable, User's Guide)
6800-30-51213
Rolling Stand with Quick Release (Passport 8)
045-000924-00
Transport stand for rolling stand (Passport 12)
115-002966-00
Quick Release for wall mount (Passport 8/Passport 12)/Quick release for Passport 12
rolling stand
045-000954-00
M series wall mount with Quick Release (Passport 8 and Passport 12)
045-000931-00
VHM wall mount (Passport 8 and Passport 12)
115-006911-00
27-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A Product Specifications
A.1 Monitor Safety Specifications
A.1.1 Classifications
The monitor is classified, according to IEC60601-1:
Type of protection against electrical shock
Degree of protection against electrical shock
Mode of operation
Degree of protection against harmful ingress
of water
Class I, equipment energized from an external and internal electrical
power source.
Type BF defibrillation proof for CO2 and AG monitoring.
Type CF defibrillation proof for ECG, RESP, TEMP, SpO2, NIBP, IBP and C.O..
Continuous
IPX1 (Protection against vertically falling water drops)
A.1.2 Environmental Specifications
CAUTION

The equipment may not meet the performance specifications if stored or used outside the specified
temperature and humidity ranges.
Main unit
Item
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Temperature (°C)
0 to 40
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
15% to 95%
10% to 95%
Barometric (kPa)
57.0 to 107.4
16.0 to 107.4
Item
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Temperature (°C)
0 to 40
-20 to 60
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
15% to 95%
10% to 95%
Barometric (kPa)
57.3 to 105.3
57.3 to 105.3
Item
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Temperature (°C)
5 to 40
-20 to 60
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
15% to 95%
10% to 95%
Barometric (kPa)
57.3 to 105.3
57.3 to 105.3
Passport 8: -30 to 70
Passport 12: -20 to 60
Microstream CO2 module
Sidestream CO2 module
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-1
AG module
Item
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Temperature (°C)
10 to 40
-20 to 60
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
15% to 95%
10% to 95%
Barometric (kPa)
70 to 107.4
70 to 107.4
NOTE

The environmental specifications of unspecified parameters are the same as those of the main unit of
Passport 12.
A.2 Power Supply Specifications
AC power
Line voltage
100 to 240 VAC (±10%)
Current
1.3 to 0.5 A
Frequency
50/60 Hz (±3Hz)
Battery
Battery Type
Chargeable Lithium-Ion, 11.1DVC, 4.5 Ah
≥ 4 hours
when powered by one new fully-charged battery (25°C, SpO2, ECG, disconnected from
Temp cable, Auto NIBP measurements at intervals of 15 minutes)
Passport 12
≥ 8 hours
when powered by two new fully-charged batteries (25°C, SpO2 sensor and ECG cable
connected, Temp cable not connected, Auto NIBP measurements at an interval of 15
Run time
minutes)
≥ 6 hours
Passport 8
when powered by a new fully-charged battery (25°C, SpO2 sensor and ECG cable
connected, Temp cable not connected, Auto NIBP measurements at an interval of 15
minutes
Charge time
Shutdown delay
Less than 3 hours to 90%, and less than 4 hours to 100% when the monitor is off.
Less than 8 hours to 90%, and less than 12 hours to 100% when the monitor is on.
at least 20 min (after a low battery alarm first occurs)
A.3 Physical Specifications
Model
Passport 12
Passport 8
A-2
Size (Width×Height×Thickness)
318mm×274mm×128mm
(12.6 inch × 10.8 inch × 5.1 inch)
238mm×225mm×128mm
(9.4 inch × 8.9 inch × 5.1 inch)
Weight
Remark
≤4.5 kg (10 pound)
≤3.5 kg (7.8 pound)
Standard parameters,
including touchscreen and
recorder, and battery (2
batteries for Passport 12)
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A.4 Hardware Specifications
A.4.1 Display
Host display
Screen Size
(diagonal)
Passport 12
12.1”
Passport 8
8.4”
Screen type
Resolution
color TFT LCD
800×600 pixels
External display
Screen type
Medical-grade TFT LCD
A.4.2 Recorder
Method
Thermal dot array
Paper width
50 mm±1 mm
Paper speed
25 mm/s or 50 mm/s with accuracy within ±5%
Number of waveform channels
Maximum 3
A.4.3 LEDs
Alarm lamp
1 (two color coded: yellow and red)
Power on LED
1 (green)
AC power LED
1 (green)
Battery LED
1 (green)
A.4.4 Audio Indicator
Speaker
Give alarm tones (45 to 85 dB), key tones, QRS tones; support PITCH TONE and
multi-level tone modulation; alarm tones comply with IEC60601-1-8.
A.4.5 Monitor Interface Specifications
Power
1 AC power input connector
Wired network
1 RJ45 connector, 100 Base-TX, IEEE 802.3
USB
2 connectors, USB 2.0
Equipotential Grounding Terminal
1
Multifunctional connector
1
VGA connector
1
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-3
A.4.6 Outputs
Analog Output
Standard
Meets the requirements of IEC60601-1 for short-circuit protection and leakage
current
ECG Analog Output
Diagnostic mode:
0.05 to 150 Hz
Bandwidth
Monitor mode:
0.5 to 40 Hz
(-3dB; reference frequency: 10Hz)
Surgical mode:
1 to 20 Hz
ST mode:
0.05 to 40 Hz
QRS delay
≤ 25 ms (in diagnostic mode, and non-paced)
Sensitivity
1V/mV ±5%
Pace enhancement
PACE rejection/enhancement
Signal amplitude: Voh≥2.5V
Pulse width: 10ms±5%
Signal rising and falling time: ≤100µs
IBP Analog Output (For Passport 12 only)
Bandwidth (-3dB; reference
frequency:1Hz)
DC to 40 Hz
Max transmission delay
30 ms
Sensitivity
1 V/100 mmHg ±5%
Nurse Call Signal
Amplitude
Rising and falling time
High level: 3.5 to 5 V, providing a maximum of 10 mA output current;
Low level: < 0.5 V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input current.
≤1 ms
Defib Sync Pulse
Output impedance
≤100 Ω
Max time delay
35 ms (R-wave peak to leading edge of pulse)
Amplitude
High level: 3.5 to 5 V, providing a maximum of 10 mA output current;
Low level: < 0.5 V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input current.
Pulse width
100 ms ±10%
Rising and falling time
≤1 ms
Alarm output (Network connector)
Alarm delay time from the monitor to
The alarm delay time form the monitor to remote equipment is ≤2 seconds,
remote equipment
measured at the monitor’s signal output connector.
A.5 Data Storage
Trends: 120 hours, at 1 min resolution
Trends
Mid-length trends: 4 hours, at 5 s resolution
Minitrends: 1 hour, at 1 s resolution
Parameter alarms
A-4
100 alarms and manual events and related parameter waveforms. The waveform
recording length can be 8s, 16s, or 32s.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Arrh. events
NIBP measurements
Full-disclosure waveforms
100 arrhythmia events and relate waveforms and parameters. The waveform
recording length can be 8s, 16s, or 32s.
1000 sets
48 hours at maximum. The specific storage time depends on the waveforms stored
and the number of stored waveforms.
A.6 Wireless Network
Standards
IEEE 802.11b/g/n, support Wi-Fi
IEEE 802.11n supports 2.4 GHz only
Code error of wireless layer
< 100 ppm
Priority
All communication data types shall have the same priority.
Total delay of data transmission from the monitor to the CMS: ≤ 2s.
Transmission delay
Delay of configuration settings transmission from CMS to the monitor: ≤ 2s
(measured from configuring on CMS to the settings take effect on the monitor).
Roaming
System capacity
Dynamic networking stability
Network switchover is automatically executed when the monitor moves from the
coverage area of one AP to that of another AP.
Number of the monitor supported by a single AP is ≤ 16. Each monitor can
communicate with the CMS.
The monitor meets its functional requirements when it moves at a rate of no more
than 3.75 m/s within a 15 m non-blocking linear distance.
When a network interruption occurs, the equipment shows a disconnection icon
Network interruption alarm
on the screen and presents the related alarms.
When the network interruption is resolved, wireless connection recovers
automatically.
A.7 Measurement Specifications
The adjustable range of alarm limits is the same with the measurement range of signals unless otherwise specified.
A.7.1 ECG
ECG
Standards
Lead set
ECG standard
Meet standards of EC11, EC13, EN60601-2-27/IEC60601-2-27 and IEC60601-2-25
3-lead: I, II, III
5-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V
AHA, IEC
1.25 mm/mV (X0.125), 2.5 mm/mV (X0.25), 5 mm/mV (X0.5), 10 mm/mV (X1), 20
Display sensitivity
mm/mV (X2), 40 mm/mV (X4)
Accuracy: ±5%
Sweep speed
Bandwidth (-3dB)
6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s,
Accuracy: ±10%
Diagnostic mode:
0.05 to 150 Hz
Monitor mode:
0.5 to 40 Hz
Surgical mode:
1 to 20 Hz
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-5
Common mode rejection ratio
ST mode:
0.05 to 40 Hz
Diagnostic mode:
>90 dB
Monitor mode:
>105 dB
Surgical mode:
>105 dB
ST mode:
>105 dB
Notch
50/60 Hz
Differential input impedance
≥5 MΩ
Input signal range
±8 mV (peak-to-peak value)
Accuracy of reappearing input signal
Based on EC11 to determine system total error and frequency response.
Electrode offset potential tolerance
±500 mV
Lead-off detection current
Input offset current
Measuring electrode: <0.1 μA
Drive electrode: <1 μA
Measuring electrode: ≤0.1 μA
Drive electrode: ≤1 μA
Baseline recovery time
<5 s (after defibrillation)
Patient leakage current
<10 uA
Calibration signal
1mV (peak-to-peak value)
Accuracy: ±5%
Cut mode: 300 W
ESU protection
Coagulate mode: 100 W
Recovery time: ≤10 s
In compliance with the requirements in clause 4.2.9.14 of ANSI/AAMI EC 13:2002
Based on the test method in clause 5.2.9.14 of EC 13, use ECG lead wires which are
ESU noise suppression
in compliance with AAMI. Compared with ECG baseline, the noise of peak to peak
value ≤2 mV.
Pace Pulse
Pace pulses meeting the following conditions are labelled with a PACE marker:
Pace pulse markers
Amplitude:
±2 to ±700 mV
Width:
0.1 to 2 ms
Rise time:
10 to 100 µs
When tested in accordance with the ANSI/AAMI EC13: Sections 4.1.4.1 and 4.1.4.3,
the heart rate meter rejects all pulses meeting the following conditions.
Pace pulse rejection
Pacer pulse detector rejection of fast
ECG signals
Amplitude:
±2 to ±700 mV
Width:
0.1 to 2 ms
Rise time:
10 to 100 µs
10V/s RTI when measured in accordance with ANSI/AAMI EC13 Section 4.1.4.3.
HR
Measurement range
Neonate:
15 to 350 bpm
Pediatric:
15 to 350 bpm
Adult:
15 to 300 bpm
Resolution
1 bpm
Accuracy
±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater.
A-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Sensitivity
200μV (lead II)
In compliance with the requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 d)of ANSI/AAMI EC13, the
following method is used:
HR averaging method
Heart rate is computed by averaging the most recent 16 RR intervals, unless the HR
by averaging the most recent 4 heart beats is less than or equal to 48.
The HR value displayed on the monitor screen is updated every second.
In compliance with the requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 e) of ANSI/AAMI EC13, the
heart rate after 20 seconds of stabilization is displayed as follows:
Response to irregular rhythm
Ventricular bigeminy (3a):
80±1 bpm
Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy (3b): 60±1 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy (3c): 120±1 bpm
Bidirectional systoles (3d):
90±2 bpm
Meets the requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13: Section 4.1.2.1 f ).
Response time to heart rate change
From 80 to 120 bpm: less than 11 s
From 80 to 40 bpm: less than 11 s
Meets the requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13: section 4.1.2.1 g).
Waveform
Time to alarm for tachycardia
4ah - range:
< 11 s
4a - range:
< 11 s
4ad - range:
< 11 s
Waveform 4bh - range:
< 11 s
4b - range:
< 11 s
4bd - range:
< 11 s
When the test is performed based on part 4.1.2.1 c) of ANSI/AAMI EC 13-2002, the
Tall T-wave rejection capability
heart rate meter will reject all 100 ms QRS complexes with less than 1.2 mV of
amplitude, and T waves with T-wave interval of 180 ms and those with Q-T interval
of 350 ms.
Arrhythmia Analysis Classifications
Asystole, Vfib, Vtac, Vent. Rhythm, Couplet, VT>2, Bigeminy, Trigeminy, R on T,
Multif. PVC, Irr. Rhythm, Tachy, Brady, Missed Beats, PNP, PNC
ST Segment Analysis
Measurement range
Accuracy
-2.0 to 2.0 mV RTI
-0.8 to 0.8 mV:
±0.02 mV or ±10%, whichever is greater.
Beyond this range:
Not specified.
Refreshing rate
per 16 heartbeats
Resolution
0.01 mV
Alarm limit
Range
HR High
(low limit + 2) to 300 bpm
HR Low
15 to (high limit – 2) bpm
ST High
(low limit +0.2) to 2.0 mV
ST Low
-2.0 to (high limit – 0.2) mV
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Step
1bpm
0.1mV
A-7
Mindray algorithm (currently unavailable in the US and Canada)
Only the differences from the Mortara algorithm are listed.
HR
In compliance with the requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 d) of ANSI/AAMI EC13, the
following method is used:
If the last 3 consecutive RR intervals are greater than 1200 ms, the 4 most recent RR
HR averaging method
intervals are averaged to compute the HR. Otherwise, heart rate is computed by
subtracting the maximum and minimum ones from the most recent 12 RR intervals
and then averaging them.
The HR value displayed on the monitor screen is updated every second.
Asystole, VFib/VTac, Vtac, Vent. Brady, Extreme Tachy, Extreme Brady, PVC, Couplet,
Arrhythmia Analysis Classifications
Bigeminy, Trigeminy, R on T, VT>2, PVCs, Tachy, Brady, Missed Beats, Vent. Rhythm,
PNP, PNC, Multif. PVC, Nonsus. Vtac, Pause, Irr. Rhythm
ST Segment Analysis
Refreshing rate
10 s
A.7.2 Resp
Technique
Trans-thoracic impedance
Lead
Options are lead I and II. The default is lead II.
Respiration excitation waveform
<300 µA RMS, 62.8 kHz (±10%)
Baseline impedance range
200 to 2500Ω (using an ECG cable with 1kΩ resistance)
Bandwidth
0.2 to 2.5 Hz (-3 dB)
Sweep speed
6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s or 25 mm/s
Accuracy: ±10%
Respiration Rate
Measurement range
Resolution
Accuracy
Adult:
0 to 120 rpm
Pediatric, neonate:
0 to 150 rpm
1 rpm
7 to 150 rpm:
±2 rpm or ±2%, whichever is greater
0 to 6 rpm:
Not specified.
Apnea alarm time
10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
Alarm limit
Range (rpm)
RR High
RR Low
A-8
Step (rpm)
Adult, pediatric:
(low limit + 2) to 100
Neonate:
(low limit + 2) to 150
1
0 to (high limit – 2)
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A.7.3 SpO2
Alarm limit
Range (%)
SpO2 High
(low limit + 2) to 100
SpO2 Low
Desat
Step (%)
Masimo: Desat to (high limit – 2)
Nellcor: Desat or20 (whichever is greater) to (high limit – 2)
1
0 to (high limit – 2)
Masimo SpO2 Module
Standards
Meet standards of ISO9919
SpO2 measurement range
1 to 100%
Resolution
1%
70 to 100%: ±2% (measured without motion in adult/pediatric mode)
Accuracy
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured without motion in neonate mode)
70 to 100%: ±3% (measured with motion)
1% to 69%: Not specified.
Refreshing rate
1s
SpO2 averaging time
2-4 s, 4-6 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 16 s
Low perfusion conditions
Pulse amplitude: >0.02%
Light penetration: >5%
Low perfusion SpO2 accuracy
±2%
PI measurement range
0.02~20 %
Nellcor SpO2 Module
Standards
Meet standards of ISO9919
Measurement range
0 to 100%
Resolution
1%
70 to 100%: ±2% (adult/pediatric)
Accuracy
70 to 100%: ±3% (neonate)
0% to 69%: Not specified.
*: When the SpO2 sensor is applied for neonatal patients as indicated, the specified accuracy range is increased by ±1%, to
compensate for the theoretical effect on oximeter measurements of fetal hemoglobin in neonatal blood.
A.7.4 PR
Alarm limit
Range (bpm)
PR High
(low limit +2) to 300
PR Low
15 to (high limit-2)
Step (bpm)
1
PR from Masimo SpO2 Module
Measurement range
25 to 240 bpm
Resolution
1 bpm
Accuracy
±3 bpm (measured without motion)
±5 bpm (measured with motion)
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-9
Refreshing rate
1s
SPO2 averaging time
2-4 s, 4-6 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 16 s
Low perfusion conditions
Low perfusion PR accuracy
Pulse amplitude: >0.02%
Light penetration: >5%
±3 bpm
PR from Nellcor SpO2 Module
Measurement range
20 to 300 bpm
Resolution
1 bpm
Accuracy
Refreshing rate
20 to 250 bpm: ±3 bpm
251 to 300 bpm, not specified
1s
PR from NIBP Module
Measurement range
40 to 240 bpm
Resolution
1 bpm
Accuracy
±3bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater
PR from IBP Module
Measurement range
25 to 350 bpm
Resolution
1 bpm
Accuracy
±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater
Refreshing rate
1s
A.7.5 NIBP
Standards
Meet standards of EN60601-2-30/IEC60601-2-30, EN1060-1, EN1060-3, SP10 and
EN1060-4
Technique
Oscillometry
Mode of operation
Manual, Auto and STAT
Auto mode repetition intervals
STAT mode cycle time
Max measurement time
1 min, 2 min, 2.5 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 1.5 h, 2 h, 3 h,
4 h, 8 h
5 min
Adult, pediatric:
180 s
Neonate:
90 s
Adult
Pediatric
Neonate
Measurement ranges
Systolic:
40 to 270
40 to 200
40 to 135
(mmHg)
Diastolic:
10 to 210
10 to 150
10 to 100
Mean:
20 to 230
20 to 165
20 to 110
Accuracy
Resolution
A-10
Max mean error: ±5 mmHg
Max standard deviation: 8 mmHg
1mmHg
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Initial cuff inflation pressure range
(mmHg)
Default initial cuff inflation pressure
(mmHg)
Software overpressure protection
Hardware overpressure protection
Alarm limit
Adult:
80 to 280
Pediatric:
80 to 210
Neonate:
60 to 140
Adult:
160
Pediatric:
140
Neonate:
90
Adult:
297±3 mmHg
Pediatric:
240±3 mmHg
Neonate:
147±3 mmHg
Adult:
≦330 mmHg
Pediatric:
≦330 mmHg
Neonate:
≦165 mmHg
Range (mmHg)
Step (mmHg)
Adult: (low limit+5) to 270
Sys High
Pediatric: (low limit+5) to 200
Neonate: (low limit+5) to 135
Sys Low
40 to (high limit-5)
Adult: (low limit+5) to 230
Mean High
Pediatric: (low limit+5) to 165
Neonate: (low limit+5) to 110
Mean Low
5
20 to (high limit-5)
Adult: (low limit+5) to 210
Dia High
Pediatric: (low limit+5) to 150
Neonate: (low limit+5) to 100
Dia Low
10 to (high limit-5)
**Measurement accuracy verification: In adult and pediatric modes, the blood pressure measurements measured
with this device are in compliance with the American National Standard for Electronic or Automated
Sphymomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992) in terms of mean error and stardard deviation by comparing with
intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements (depending on the configuration) in a typical patient population. For
auscultatory reference, the 5th Korotkoff sound was used to determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements measured with this device are in compliance with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphymomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992 and
AAMI/ANSI SP10A-1996) in terms of mean error and stardard deviation by comparing with intra-arterial
measurements (depending on the configuration) in a typical patient population.
A.7.6 Temp
Standards
Meet standard of EN12470-4
Technique
Thermal resistance
Measurement range
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
Resolution
0.1 °C
Accuracy
±0.1 °C without probe)
Refreshing rate
1s
Minimum time for accurate
Body surface: <100 s
measurement
Body cavity: <80 s
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-11
Alarm limit
Range
T1/T2 High
(low limit +1) to 50°C
T1/T2 Low
0.1 to (high limit -1) °C
TD High
0.1 to 50°C
Step
0.1 °C
A.7.7 IBP
Standards
Meet standard of EN60601-2-34/IEC60601-2-34.
Technique
Direct invasive measurement
IBP
Measurement range
-50 to 300 mmHg
Resolution
1 mmHg
Accuracy
±2% or ±1 mmHg, whichever is greater (without sensor)
Refreshing rate
1s
Pressure transducer
Excitement voltage
5 VDC, ±2%
Sensitivity
5 μV/V/mmHg
Impedance range
300 to 3000Ω
Alarm limit
Range (mmHg)
Step (mmHg)
Sys High
Mean High
(low limit + 2) to 300
Dia High
1
Sys Low
Mean Low
-50 to (high limit – 2)
Dia Low
A.7.8 C.O.
Measurement method
Thermodilution method
C.O.:
0.1 to 20 L/min
TB:
23 to 43 °C
TI:
0 to 27 °C
C.O.:
0.1 L/min
TB, TI:
0.1 °C
C.O.:
±5% or ±0.1 L /min, whichever is greater
TB, TI:
±0.1 °C (without sensor)
Repeatability
C.O.:
±2% or ±0.1 L/min, whichever is greater
Alarm range
TB:
23 to 43 °C
Measurement range
Resolution
Accuracy
A-12
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Alarm limit
Range
TB High
(low limit + 1) to 43°C
TB Low
23 to (high limit - 1) °C
Step
0.1 °C
A.7.9 CO2
Measurement mode
Sidestream, microstream, mainstream
Technique
Infrared absorption
Sidestream CO2 Module
Standard
Meet standard of ISO 21647
CO2 Measurement range
0 to 99 mmHg
Accuracy*
0 to 40 mmHg:
±2 mmHg
41 to 76 mmHg:
±5% of the reading
77 to 99 mmHg:
±10% of the reading
Accuracy drift
Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours
Resolution
1 mmHg
Sample flowrate
Sample flowrate tolerance
Warm-up time
Adult: 70 ml/min, 100 ml/min, 120 ml/min, 150 ml/min
Pediatric, neonate: 70 ml/min, 100 ml/min
15% or 15 ml/min, whichever is greater.
Iso accuracy mode: ≤45s
Full accuracy mode: ≤10 min
Measured with a neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter neonatal sampling line, or an
adult watertrap and a 2.5-meter adult sampling line:
Rise time
<400 ms @ 70 ml/min
<330 ms @ 100 ml/min
<300 ms @ 120 ml/min
<240 ms @ 150 ml/min
Measured with a neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter neonatal sampling line:
<4 s @ 100 ml/min
<4.5 s @ 70 ml/min
Gas sampling delay time
Measured with an adult watertrap and a 2.5-meter adult sampling line:
<4.5 s @ 150 ml/min
< 5 s @ 120 ml/min
<5.5 s @ 100 ml/min
<6.5 s @ 70 ml/min
awRR measurement range
0 to 120 rpm
awRR measurement precision
±2 rpm
Apnea time
10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
Note: The response time is the sum of the rise time and the delay time.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-13
Effect of interference gases on CO2 measurements
Gas
Concentration (%)
N2O
≤60
Hal
≤4
Sev
≤5
Iso
≤5
Enf
≤5
Des
≤15
Quantitive effect*
±1 mmHg
±2 mmHg
*: means an extra error should be added in case of gas interference when CO2 measurements are performed between
0-40mmHg.
Alarm limit
Range
EtCO2 High
(low limit + 2) to 99 mmHg
EtCO2 Low
1 to (high limit - 2)mmHg
FiCO2 High
1 to 99 mmHg
awRR High
awRR Low
Step
1 mmHg
Adult, pediatric:
(low limit + 2) to 100 rpm
Neonate:
(low limit + 2) to 150 rpm
1 rpm
0 to (high limit - 2) rpm
Microstream CO2 Module
Standard
Meet standard of ISO 21647
CO2 Measurement range
0 to 99 mmHg
Accuracy*
Accuracy drift
0 to 38 mmHg:
±2 mmHg
39 to 99 mmHg:
±5% of the reading+0.08% of (the reading-38)
Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours
* This accuracy is applied to respiration rate no greater than 80 rpm. For respiration rate greater than 80 rpm and EtCO2 value
greater than 18 mmHg, the accuracy is 4 mmHg or ±12% of the reading, whichever is greater. For respiration rate greater than
60 rpm, the above accuracy can be achieved by using the CapnoLine H Set for Infant/Neonatal. In the presence of interfering
gases, the accuracy specification deteriorates by 4% of the above accuracy.
Resolution
1 mmHg
Sample flow rate
50−+7.5
15
Initialization time
30 s (typical)
ml/min
Measured with a FilterLine of standard length:
2.9 s (typical),
Response time
4.5 s (Maximum)
The response time is the sum of the rise time and the delay time
Rise time: <190 ms (10% to 90%)
Delay time: 2.7 s (typical)
awRR measurement range
awRR measurement accuracy
A-14
0 to 150 rpm
0 to 70 rpm:
±1 rpm
71 to 120 rpm:
±2 rpm
121 to 150 rpm:
±3 rpm
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Apnea alarm time
10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
Alarm limit
Range
EtCO2 High
(low limit + 2) to 99 mmHg
EtCO2 Low
1 to (high limit – 2)mmHg
FiCO2 High
1 to 99 mmHg
awRR High
awRR Low
Step
1 mmHg
Adult, pediatric:
(low limit + 2) to 100 rpm
Neonate:
(low limit + 2) to 150 rpm
1 rpm
0 to (high limit – 2) rpm
A.7.10 AG (For Passport 12 only)
Standards
Meet standard of ISO 21647
Technique
Infrared absorption
Warm-up time
Sample flow rate
Measurement range
Resolution
Iso accuracy mode:
≤ 45 s
Full accuracy mode:
≤ 10 min
Adult, pediatric:
120, 150, 200 ml/min
Neonate:
70, 90, 120 ml/min
Accuracy:
±10 ml/min or ±10%, whichever is greater
CO2:
0 to 30%
O2:
0 to 100%
N2O:
0 to 100%
Des:
0 to 30%
Sev:
0 to 30%
Enf:
0 to 30%
Iso:
0 to 30%
Hal:
0 to 30%
awRR:
2 to 100 rpm
CO2:
1 mmHg
awRR:
1 rpm
Gases
Range (%REL)
Accuracy (%ABS)
0 to 1
±0.1
1 to 5
±0.2
5 to 7
±0.3
7 to 10
±0.5
>10
Not specified
0 to 20
±2
20 to 100
±3
0 to 25
±1
25 to 80
±2
80 to 100
±3
0 to 1
±0.15
1 to 5
±0.2
5 to 10
±0.4
10 to 15
±0.6
15 to 18
±1
>18
Not specified
CO2
N2O
Full accuracy
O2
Des
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
A-15
Sev
Enf, Iso, Hal
awRR
0 to 1
±0.15
1 to 5
±0.2
5 to 8
±0.4
>8
Not specified
0 to 1
±0.15
1 to 5
±0.2
>5
Not specified
2 to 60 rpm
±1 rpm
>60 rpm
Not specified
Accuracy drift
Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours
Apnea alarm time
10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s
Refreshing rate
1s
Using the DRYLINE™ water trap and neonatal DRYLINE™ sampling line (2.5m):
Response time
120 ml/min
90 ml/min
70 ml/min
CO2
≤4S s
≤ 4.5 s
≤5 s
N2O
≤4.2 s
≤5 s
≤5.5 s
O2
≤4 s
≤5 s
≤6 s
Hal, Iso, Sev, Enf
≤4.4 s
≤5.2 s
≤6 s
Des
≤4.4 s
≤5 s
≤6 s
Using the DRYLINE™ water trap and adult DRYLINE™ sampling line (2.5m)
200 ml/min
150 ml/min
120 ml/min
CO2
≤4.2 s
≤4.8 s
≤5.5 s
N2O
≤4.3 s
≤5 s
≤5.8 s
O2
≤4 s
≤4.6 s
≤5.5 s
Hal, Iso, Sev, Enf, Des
≤4.5 s
≤5.2 s
≤6 s
Primary anesthetic agent
In full accuracy mode: 0.15%,
Anesthetic agent limit
Second anesthetic agent:
In full accuracy mode: 0.3% or 5% REL (10% in ISO accuracy mode) of primary agent if
primary agent is greater than 10%
Effect of interference gases on AG measurements
Gas
Concentration(%)
CO2
Quantitive effect(%ABS)3)
CO2
N2O
Agent 1)
O2
/
/
0.1
0
0.2
N2O
/
0.1
/
0.1
0.2
Agent 1) 2)
/
0.1
0.1
0.1
1.0
Xenon
<100%
0.1
0
0
/
Helium
<50%
0.1
0
0
/
Ethanol
<0.1%
0
0
0
/
Acetone
<1%
0.1
0.1
0
/
Methane
<1%
0.1
0.1
0
/
Saturated Isopropanol vapour
/
0.1
0
0
/
O2
/
0.1
0.1
0.1
/
5)
4)
1) Agent represents one of Des, Iso, Enf, Sev, and Hal.
A-16
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
2) Multiple agent interference on CO2, N2O and O2 is typically the same as single agent interference.
3) For CO2, N2O and Agents, maximum interference from each gas at concentrations within specified accuracy ranges for each
gas. The total interference of all gases is never larger than 5%REL.
4) Applicable to type A AG module, representing the interference effect of secondary anesthetic agents on primary anesthetic
agent.
5) Measurement interference to type M AG module originates from the applied anesthetic agent that is configured manually.
Alarm limit
Range
EtCO2 High
(low limit + 2) to 99 mmHg
EtCO2 Low
1to (high limit - 2)mmHg
FiCO2 High
1 to 99 mmHg
awRR High
Step
Adult, pediatric:
(low limit + 2) to 100 rpm
Neonate:
(low limit + 2) to 150 rpm
awRR Low
0 to (high limit - 2)rpm
EtO2 High
(low limit + 2) to 100 %
EtO2 Low
18 to (high limit - 2)%
FiO2 High
(low limit + 2) to 100 %
FiO2 Low
18 to (high limit - 2)%
EtN2O High
(low limit + 2) to 100 %
EtN2O Low
0 to (high limit - 2)%
FiN2O High
(low limit + 2) to 100 %
FiN2O Low
0 to (high limit - 2)%
EtHal/Enf/Iso High
(low limit + 0.2) to 5.0 %
EtHal/Enf/Iso Low
0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
FiHal/Enf/Iso High
(low limit + 0.2) to 5.0 %
FiHal/Enf/Iso Low
0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
EtSev High
(low limit + 0.2) to 8.0 %
EtSev Low
0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
FiSev High
(low limit + 0.2) to 8.0 %
FiSev Low
0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
EtDes High
(low limit + 0.2) to 18.0 %
EtDes Low
0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
FiDes High
(low limit + 0.2) to 18.0 %
FiDes Low
0 to (high limit - 0.2)%
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1 mmHg
1 rpm
0.1%
1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
A-17
FOR YOUR NOTES
A-18
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
B EMC and Radio Regulatory Compliance
B.1 EMC
The device meets the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2.
Note

Using accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified may result in increased
electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity of the patient monitoring equipment.

The device or its components should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or
stacked use is necessary, the device or its components should be observed to verify normal operation in the
configuration in which it will be used.

The device needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service
according to the EMC information provided below.

Other devices may interfere with this monitor even though they meet the requirements of CISPR.

When the inputted signal is below the minimum amplitude provided in technical specifications, erroneous
measurements could result.

Portable and mobile communication equipment may affect the performance of this monitor.
Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Emissions
The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device
should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission tests
Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Radio frequency (RF) emissions
Group 1
The device uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its
CISPR 11
RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions CISPR 11
Class A
The device is suitable for use in all establishments other than
Harmonic emissions
Class A
domestic and those directly connected to the public
low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used
IEC61000-3-2
Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker
Complies
for domestic purposes.
Emissions IEC 61000-3-3
WARNING

This equipment/system is intended for use by healthcare professionals only. This equipment/ system may
cause radio interference or may disrupt the operation of nearby equipment. It may be necessary to take
mitigation measures, such as re-orienting or relocating the [ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM] or shielding the
location.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
B-1
Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity
The device is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device
should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic environment -
Immunity test
IEC60601 test level
Compliance level
Electrostatic discharge
±6 kV contact
±6 kV contact
Floors should be wood, concrete or
(ESD) IEC 61000-4-2
±8 kV air
±8 kV air
ceramic tile. If floors are covered
guidance
with synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
±2 kV for power supply lines
±2 kV for power supply lines
Mains power quality should be that
transient/burst IEC
±1 kV for input/output lines
±1 kV for input/output lines
of a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
61000-4-4
Surge IEC 61000-4-5
±1 kV line(s) to line(s)
±1 kV line(s) to line(s)
±2 kV line(s) to earth
±2 kV line(s) to earth
Voltage dips, short
<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for
<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for
Mains power quality should be that
interruptions and
0.5 cycle
0.5 cycle
of a typical commercial or hospital
power supply input
40 % UT (60 % dip in UT) for 5
40 % UT (60 % dip in UT) for 5
product requires continued
lines IEC 61000-4-11
cycles
cycles
operation during power mains
environment. If the user of our
voltage variations on
interruptions, it is recommended
70 % UT (30 % dip in UT) for
70 % UT (30 % dip in UT) for
that our product be powered from
25 cycles
25 cycles
an uninterruptible power supply or
a battery.
Power frequency
<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for
<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for
5s
5s
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency magnetic fields
(50/60 HZ) magnetic
should be at levels characteristic of
field IEC 61000-4-8
a typical location in a typical
commercial or hospital
environment.
Note: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
B-2
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity
The device is intended for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The customer or the user of the device should
assure that it is used in such an environment as described below.
Immunity test
IEC60601 test
Compliance
level
level
Conduced RF
3 Vrms
3Vrms
IEC61000-4-6
150 kHz to 80 MHz
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should
be used no closer to any part of the system, including cables,
than the recommended separation distance calculated from
the equation appropriate for the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distances:
d = 1.2 P
Radiated RF
3V/m
IEC61000-4-3
80MHz to 2.5GHz
3V/m
Recommended separation distances:
80 MHz~800 MHz
d = 1.2 P
800MHz-2.5GHz
d = 2 .3 P
Where, P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance
in meters (m).b
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by
an electromagnetic site survey a, should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency range b.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following
symbol:
Note 1: At 80 MHz to 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios,
amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the
electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the
measured field strength in the location in which the [ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM] is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the [ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM] should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the [ME EQUIPMENT or
ME SYSTEM].
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than3 V/m.
WARNING

The monitor is configured with a wireless network connector to receive wireless signal. Other devices may
interfere with this monitor even though they meet the requirements of CISPR.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
B-3
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the device
The device is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the device can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the device as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum
Separation distance in meters (m) according to frequency of the transmitter
output power of
150 kHz - 80 MHz
80 MHz - 800 MHz
800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2 P
d = 1.2 P
d = 2.3 P
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.20
1.20
2.30
10
3.80
3.80
7.30
100
12.00
12.00
23.00
transmitter(W)
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
B-4
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
B.2 Radio Regulatory Compliance
This Wi-Fi device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
The patient monitor including Wi-Fi module (US only) complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Operation of this equipment requires the prior coordination with a frequency coordinator designated by the FCC for the
Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
The patient monitor including Wi-Fi module - FCC and Industry Canada Radio Compliance: This device complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly
approved by Mindray may cause harmful radio frequency interference and void your authority to operate this
equipment.
The maximum antenna gain permitted complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as stated in RSS-210.
The maximum antenna gain permitted complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point operation, as stated in
RSS-210.
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive).
CAUTION

Keep a distance of at least 20cm away from the monitor when Wi-Fi function is in use.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
B-5
FOR YOUR NOTES
B-6
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C Default Configurations
This chapter lists some of the most important factory default settings for each department in configuration
management. You cannot change the factory default configuration itself. However, you can make changes to the
settings from the factory default configuration and then save the changed configuration as a user configuration. The last
column of the following tables is for your notes and review.
Note: In this chapter, O.M means the monitor’s operating mode. Column C refers to the settings that can be changed in
configuration management. Column M refers to the settings that can be changed in monitoring mode.
C.1 Parameters Configuration
C.1.1 ECG
ECG Setup
O.M
Item Name
C
Lead Set
M
General
*
Auto
Alm Source
*
*
HR
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
Adu
HR/PR High
HR/PR Low
Ped
*
*
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
160
200
Adu
50
*
*
Neo
75
100
Sweep
*
*
25 mm/s
Beat Vol
*
*
2
*
No
Paced
Notch Filter
*
*
Weak
Gain
*
*
X1
Filter
*
*
Monitor
ECG Display
*
*
Normal
*
60
Pacemaker Rate
ICU
120
Neo
Ped
OR
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
1
Surgery
Monitor
Diagnostic
C-1
ST Analysis
Item Name
O.M
General
C
M
ST Analysis
*
*
Off
Alarm
*
*
Off
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
ST-X High
*
*
ST-X Low
*
*
ISO
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
On
when ST Unit is mV:
0.20
when ST Unit is mm:
2.0
when ST Unit is mV:
-0.20
when ST Unit is mm:
-2.0
-80 ms
J
*
ST
*
48 ms
J + 60 ms
X represents I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 or V6.
Arrh. Analysis
Item Name
Algorithm
O.M
C
M
*
*
General
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
Arrhythmia Threshold Settings
PVCs High
Tachy
*
Brady
*
Asys. Delay
Vtac Rate
Vtac PVCs
Multif. PVC’s
Window
Extreme Tachy
Extreme Brady
C-2
Mindray
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Adu, Ped:
10
Neo:
N/A
Adu:
120
Ped:
160
Neo:
N/A
Adu:
50
Ped:
75
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
5
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
130
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
6
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
15
Neo:
N/A
Adu:
160
Ped:
180
Neo:
N/A
Adu:
35
Ped:
50
Neo:
N/A
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Item Name
Algorithm
O.M
C
M
Vbrd Rate
*
*
Vbrd PVCs
*
*
Pause Time
*
*
PVCs High
*
*
Asys. Delay
*
*
Vtac Rate
*
*
Vtac PVCs
*
*
*
*
Multif. PVC’s
Mortara
Window
Tachy
*
Brady
*
*
*
General
OR
ICU
Adu, Ped:
40
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
5
Neo:
N/A
Ad, Ped:
2
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
10
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
4
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
130
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
6
Neo:
N/A
Adu, Ped:
15
Neo:
N/A
Adu:
120
Ped:
160
Neo:
N/A
Adu:
50
Ped:
75
Neo:
N/A
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
Arrhythmia Alarm Settings
PVCs/min
*
*
Off
On
R on T Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Nonsus. Vtac Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Vent. Rhythm Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Bigeminy Alarm
*
*
Off
On
*
*
Off
On
*
*
On
*
*
On
Vtac Alarm
*
*
On
Vent. Brady Alarm
*
*
On
*
*
On
Alarm
Trigeminy Alarm
Asystole Alarm
VFib/VTac
Alarm
Extreme Tachy
Alarm
Mindray
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C-3
Item Name
Algorithm
O.M
General
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
C
M
*
*
On
X Alarm
*
*
Off
Asystole Alm Lev
*
*
High
*
*
High
Vtac Alm Lev
*
*
High
Vent. Brady Alm Lev
*
*
High
*
*
High
*
*
High
VT>2 Alm Lev
*
*
Low
Pause Alm Lev
*
*
Low
Couplet Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
PVC Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
Irr. Rhythm Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
PNP Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
PNC Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
*
*
Prompt
X Alm Lev
*
*
Med
X Alm Rec
*
*
Off
*
*
Off
On
R on T Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Vent. Rhythm Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Bigeminy Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Trigeminy Alarm
*
*
Off
On
Extreme Brady
Alarm
VFib/VTac
Alm Lev
Extreme Tachy Alm
Lev
Extreme Brady Alm
Lev
Missed Beats Alm
Lev
PVCs/min
Alarm
Asystole Alarm
VFib Alarm
On
Mortara
On
VTac Alarm
On
X Alarm
*
*
On
Asystole Alm Lev
*
*
High
VFib Alm Lev
*
*
High
VTac Alm Lev
*
*
High
VT>2 Alm Lev
*
*
Low
C-4
User Defaults
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Item Name
Algorithm
O.M
General
C
M
Couplet Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
PVC Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
Irr. Rhythm Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
PNP Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
PNC Alm Lev
*
*
Prompt
*
*
Prompt
X Alm Lev
*
*
Med
X Alm Rec
*
*
Off
Missed Beats Alm
Lev
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
X represents a certain arrhythmia event. Refer to the Specifications chapter for details. The X in “X Alm Lev” refers to all
arrhythmia events except for those specially marked ones.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C-5
C.1.2 RESP
O.M
Item Name
General
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
Sweep
*
*
6.25 mm/s
Lead
*
*
II
Gain
*
*
X2
RR High
*
*
RR Low
*
*
Apnea Delay
*
*
Detection Mode
*
*
Auto
*
Auto
RR Source
OR
ICU
Adu, Ped:
30
Neo:
100
Adu, Ped:
8
Neo:
30
Adu, Ped:
20
Neo:
15
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.1.3 PR
O.M
Item Name
General
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
Adu
HR/PR High Ped
HR/PR Low
*
*
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
160
200
Adu
50
*
*
Neo
75
100
PR Source
*
*
SpO2
Beat Vol
*
*
2
C-6
ICU
120
Neo
Ped
OR
1
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C.1.4 SpO2
O.M
Item Name
General
OR
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
SpO2 High
*
*
SpO2 Low
*
*
90
Desat Limit
*
*
80
Sweep
*
*
25 mm/s
*
Off
NIBP Simul
ICU
NICU
Adu, Ped:
100
Neo:
95
Sensivity (Masimo)
*
*
Normal
Averaging (Masimo)
*
*
8s
Sat-Seconds (Nellcor)
*
*
0s
CCU
User Defaults
C.1.5 Temp
O.M
Item Name
General
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
T1/T2 High (ºC)
*
*
38.0
T1/T2 Low (ºC)
*
*
35.0
TD High (ºC)
*
*
2.0
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.1.6 NIBP
O.M
Item Name
General
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
Interval
*
*
15 min
*
Off
NIBP End Tone
Cuff Press.
(mmHg)
Initial Pressure
(mmHg)
Adu
Ped
*
*
NICU
CCU
5 min
15 min
30 min
15 min
User Defaults
60
40
Adu
160
Neo
ICU
80
Neo
Ped
OR
*
*
140
90
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C-7
Alarm Limits
NIBP-S High
(mmHg)
NIBP-S Low
(mmHg)
NIBP-M High
(mmHg)
NIBP-M Low
(mmHg)
NIBP-D High
(mmHg)
NIBP-D Low
(mmHg)
Adu
Ped
160
*
*
120
Neo
90
Adu
90
Ped
*
*
70
Neo
40
Adu
110
Ped
*
*
90
Neo
70
Adu
60
Ped
*
*
50
Neo
25
Adu
90
Ped
*
*
70
Neo
60
Adu
50
Ped
*
*
Neo
40
20
C.1.7 IBP
Item Name
O.M
C M
General
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
P1 Measure
*
*
All
P2 Measure
*
*
All
P3 Measure
*
*
Mean
P4 Measure
*
*
Mean
Sensitivity
*
*
Med
Sweep
*
*
25 mm/s
Filter
*
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
12.5 Hz
Art, Ao, UAP, BAP, FAP, LV, P1-P2 Arterial Pressure Alarm Limits
IBP-S High
(mmHg)
Adu
Ped
(mmHg)
IBP-M Low
C-8
*
*
120
Neo
90
Adu
90
IBP-S Low (mmHg) Ped
IBP-M High
160
*
*
70
Neo
55
Adu
110
Ped
*
*
Neo
Adu
90
70
*
*
70
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
O.M
C M
Item Name
(mmHg)
IBP-D High
(mmHg)
IBP-D Low
(mmHg)
General
Ped
50
Neo
35
Adu
90
Ped
*
*
60
Adu
50
*
*
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
70
Neo
Ped
OR
40
Neo
20
Adu
35
PA Alarm Limits
PA-S High (mmHg) Ped
(mmHg)
PA-M Low
(mmHg)
PA-D High
(mmHg)
*
60
Neo
60
Adu
10
PA-S Low (mmHg) Ped
PA-M High
*
*
*
24
Neo
24
Adu
20
Ped
*
*
26
Neo
26
Adu
0
Ped
*
*
12
Neo
12
Adu
16
Ped
*
*
4
Neo
4
Adu
0
PA-D Low (mmHg) Ped
*
*
Neo
-4
-4
CVP, LAP, RAP, ICP, UVP, P3-P4 Venous Pressure Alarm Limits
IBP-M High
(mmHg)
IBP-M Low
(mmHg)
Adu
Ped
10
*
*
4
Neo
4
Adu
0
Ped
*
*
Neo
0
0
Art, Ao, BAP, FAP, LV, P1-P2 Arterial Pressure Scale
Scale (mmHg)
*
*
0-160
*
*
0-30
*
0-20
PA Scale
Scale (mmHg)
CVP, LAP, RAP, ICP, UVP Scale
Scale (mmHg)
*
UAP, P3-P4 Venous Pressure Scale
Scale (mmHg)
*
*
0-80
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C-9
C.1.8 C.O.
O.M
Item Name
General
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
TB High (ºC)
*
*
39.0
TB Low (ºC)
*
*
36.0
Comp. Const
*
*
0.542
Auto TI
*
*
Auto
Manual TI (ºC)
*
*
2.0
Measuring mode
*
*
Manual
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.1.9 CO2
Item Name
O.M
General
OR
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
Operating Mode
*
*
Measure
Sweep
*
*
6.25 mm/s
Scale (mmHg)
*
*
50
Apnea Delay
*
*
RR Source
*
Adu, Ped:
20
Neo:
15
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
Auto
Sidestream CO2 Setup
Flow Rate
*
*
Adu:,
120 ml/min
Ped:
100 ml/min
Neo:
70 ml/min
BTPS Compen
*
*
Off
N2O Compen
*
*
0
O2 Compen
*
*
21
Des Compen
*
*
0
50
21
Microstream CO2 Setup
BTPS Compen
*
Off
Max Hold
*
*
20 s
Auto Standby (min)
*
*
0
Max Hold
*
*
10 s
O2 Compen
*
*
Off
Balance Gas
*
*
Room Air
AG Compen
*
*
0
Mainstream CO2 Setup
C-10
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Alarm Limits
EtCO2 High (mmHg)
*
*
EtCO2 Low (mmHg)
*
*
FiCO2 High (mmHg)
*
*
RR High
*
*
RR Low
*
*
Adu, Ped:
50
Neo:
45
Adu, Ped:
25
Neo:
30
Adu, Ped, Neo:
4
Adu, Ped:
30
Neo:
100
Adu, Ped:
8
Neo:
30
C.1.10 AG
Item Name
O.M
General
C
M
Alarm
*
*
On
Alm Lev
*
*
Med
Sweep
*
*
6.25 mm/s
O2 Compen
*
*
Off
Operating Mode
*
*
Measure
Flow Rate
*
*
Auto Standby
*
*
Off
Apnea Time
*
*
20 s
*
Auto
Draw
RR Source
OR
ICU
On
Off
Adu, Ped:
120 ml/min
Neo:
70 ml/min
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
CO2 Setup
Wave Type
*
*
Scale
*
*
EtCO2 High (mmHg)
*
*
EtCO2 Low (mmHg)
*
*
FiCO2 High (mmHg)
*
*
RR High
*
*
RR Low
*
*
Agent
*
*
AA
N2O Scale
*
*
50
O2 Scale
*
*
AA Scale
*
*
9.0
Hal/Enf/Iso Scale
*
*
2.5
when unit is mmHg:
50
when unit is % or KPa:
7.0
Adu, Ped:
50
Neo:
45
Adu, Ped:
25
Neo:
30
4
Adu, Ped:
30
Neo:
100
Adu, Ped:
8
Neo:
30
Gas Setup
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
when unit is mmHg:
400
when unit is %
50
or KPa:
C-11
Item Name
O.M
General
C
M
Des Scale
*
*
9.0
Sev Scale
*
*
4.0
EtO2 High
*
*
88
EtO2 Low
*
*
18
FiO2 High
*
*
FiO2 Low
*
*
18
EtN2O High
*
*
55
EtN2O Low
*
*
0
FiN2O High
*
*
53
FiN2O Low
*
*
0
EtHal/Enf/Iso High
*
*
3.0
EtHal/Enf/Iso Low
*
*
0.0
FiHal/Enf/Iso High
*
*
2.0
FiHal/Enf/Iso Low
*
*
0.0
EtSev High
*
*
6.0
EtSev Low
*
*
0.0
FiSev High
*
*
5.0
FiSev Low
*
*
0.0
EtDes High
*
*
8.0
EtDes Low
*
*
0.0
FiDes High
*
*
6.0
FiDes Low
*
*
0.0
OR
Adu, Ped:
100
Neo:
90
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
CCU
User Defaults
C.2 Routine Configuration
C.2.1 Alarm
Item Name
O.M
General
OR
ICU
*
2
1
2
*
*
Low
Recording Length
*
*
16 s
Apnea Delay
*
*
Alarm Delay
*
*
6s
ST Alarm Delay
*
*
30 s
C
M
Alm Volume
*
Reminder Vol
C-12
NICU
Adu, Ped: 20 s
Neo: 15 s
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C.2.2 Screens
O.M
Item Name
General
OR
C
M
Choose Screen
*
*
Normal Screen
Display the ST segments on ECG screen
*
*
Unselected
Select QuickKeys
*
Select Wave Sequence
for Normal Screen
ECG1
2
ECG2
3
SpO2+PR
*
*
Any IBP
6
CO2
7
Resp
Parameter 1
ECG
Parameter 2
Big Numerics Screen
Parameter 3
*
Parameter 4
CCU
User Defaults
Any IBP
5
Select Parameters for
NICU
NIBP Measure→Stop All→Review→Standby
1
4
ICU
*
SpO2+PR
Resp
NIBP
C.2.3 Waveform
O.M
Item Name
C
M
General
ECG
Green
NIBP
White
SpO2
Cyan
PR
Cyan
TEMP
White
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
Art/Ao/UAP/FAP
/BAP/LV/P1~P4
Red
(arterial pressure)
PA
Yellow
CVP/ICP/P1~P4
Parameter/
Wave Colour
Blue
(venous pressure)
LAP
*
Purple
RAP
Orange
UVP
Cyan
CO2
Yellow
RESP
Yellow
AA
Yellow
N2O
Blue
O2
Green
Hal
Red
Enf
Orange
Iso
Purple
Des
Cyan
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C-13
Sev
Yellow
C.O.
White
X represents a waveform label, such as ECG, RESP, CO2 and so forth. The ECG waveform cannot be set off.
C.2.4 Review
O.M
Item Name
Tabular Trends
Graphic Trends
General
OR
ICU
*
30 min
5min
30 min
*
*
Standard
*
*
Standard
*
2h
*
Save ECG1 by default.
C
M
Interval
*
Trend Group
Trend Group
Minitrend Length
Full Disclosure
Save Waves
*
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.2.5 Event
O.M
Item Name
C
M
General
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
Waveform 1
*
II
Waveform 2
*
I
Pleth
I
Waveform 3
*
Pleth
Resp
Pleth
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.2.6 Record
O.M
Item Name
C
M
General
Length
*
8s
Interval
*
Off
Paper Speed
*
25 mm/s
*
Off
Alm Rec
X
OR
ICU
User Defaults
X represents a parameter label.
C-14
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
C.2.7 Print
O.M
Item Name
C
Paper Size
M
General
OR
ICU
*
A4
Amplitude
*
10 mm/mV
Sweep
*
25 mm/s
Auto Interval
*
Off
Set as End Case Report
*
Unselected
Back
*
Auto
Spacing
*
Auto
Tabular Trends
Report Layout
*
Parameter Oriented
Reports
Currently Displayed Trended
*
Selected
Standard Parameter Group
*
Unselected
Custom
*
Unselected
Set as End Case Report
*
Unselected
Back
*
Auto
Zoom
*
Auto
Set as End Case Report
*
Unselected
Sweep
*
Auto
Select Wave
*
Current
ECG Reports
Parameters
Graphic Trends
Reports
Realtime Report
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.2.8 Others
O.M
Item Name
C
General
M
Brightness
*
5
Key Volume
*
2
*
On
View Other
Patient
Auto Alarm
OR
ICU
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
NICU
CCU
User Defaults
C.3 User Maintenance Items
Item Name
O.M
C
M
General
Changing Bed No.
*
Protected
Atmospheric Pressure
*
760 mmHg
Height Unit
*
cm
Weight Unit
*
kg
ST Unit
*
mV
Press. Unit
*
mmHg
CVP Unit
*
cmH2O
CO2 Unit
*
mmHg
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
OR
ICU
C-15
O.M
Item Name
C
M
General
O2 Unit
*
%
Temp Unit
*
℃
Network Type
*
LAN
OR
ICU
1
2
Latching Alarms
*
*
No
Alarm Pause Time
*
*
2 min
Minimum Alarm Volume
*
*
2
Reminder Tone
*
Off
Reminder Interval
*
1 min
ECGLeadOff Lev.
*
Low
SpO2SensorOff Lev.
*
Low
Alarm Tone Interval
*
Lethal Arrh. OFF
*
Disable
Silence Other Bed
*
On
Extended Arrh.
*
Enable
Wave Line
*
Mediate
ECG Standard
*
AHA
Notch Freq.
*
50 Hz
Data Transfer Method
*
Module
Transferred Data Length
*
4h
Data Transfer Strategy
*
Always Ask
SpO2 Tone
*
Mode 1
Signal Type
*
Continuous
Contact Type
*
Normally Closed
Signal Type
**
Continuous
Contact Type
*
Normally Closed
Nurse Call
C-16
NICU
High Level Alarm:
10 s
Med/Low Level Alarm:
20 s
Alm Lev
*
*
High, Med, Low
Alarm Cat.
*
*
Phys., Tech.
CCU
User Defaults
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
D Alarm Messages
This chapter lists only the most important physiological and technical alarm messages. Some messages appearing on
your monitor may not be included.
In this chapter:

The “I” column indicates how indications of technical alarms perform after the alarm system is reset: “A” means that
some technical alarms are cleared; “B” indicates that some technical alarms are changed to the prompt messages;
and “C” indicates that a “√” appears before the alarm message,
appears in the alarm symbol area, and the
indication of the alarm lamp depends on the alarm light setting. Refer to section 7.8 Resetting Alarms for details.

The “Level” field indicates the alarm level: H means high, M means medium and L means low. “*” means the alarm
level is user-adjustable.

XX represents a measurement or parameter label, such as ECG, NIBP, HR, ST-I, PVCs, RR, SpO2, PR, etc.
In the “Cause and Solution” column, corresponding solutions are given instructing you to troubleshoot problems. If the
problem persists, contact your service personnel.
D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages
Measurement
XX
ECG
Alarm messages
L
Cause and solution
XX Too High
M*
XX value has risen above the high alarm limit or fallen below the low
XX Too Low
M*
ECG Weak Signal
H
Asystole
H
VFib/VTac
H
Vtac
H
Vent. Brady
H
Extreme Tachy
H
Extreme Brady
H
Arrhythmia has occurred to the patient. Check the patient’s
R on T
M*
condition and the ECG connections.
VT>2
M*
Couplet
M*
PVCs/min
M*
Bigeminy
M*
Trigeminy
M*
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
alarm limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the patient
category and alarm limit settings are correct.
The ECG signal is too weak for the monitor to perform ECG analysis.
Check the patient’s condition and the ECG connections.
D-1
Measurement
Alarm messages
L
Tachy
M*
Brady
M*
Missed Beats
M*
Irr. Rhythm
M*
Vent. Rhythm
M*
Multif. PVC
M*
Nonsus. Vtac
M*
Pause
M*
PNP
M*
PNC
M*
Cause and solution
The pacer appears abnormal. Check the pacer.
The respiration signal was too weak for the monitor to perform
Resp Apnea
H
respiration analysis. Check the patient’s condition and the Resp
connections.
Resp
Resp Artifact
The patient’s heartbeat has interfered with his respiration. Check the
H
patient’s condition and the Resp connections.
The SpO2 value has fallen below the desaturation alarm limit. Check
SpO2 Desat
H
the patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit settings are
correct.
SpO2
The pulse signal was too weak for the monitor to perform pulse
No Pulse
H
analysis. Check the patient’s condition, SpO2 sensor and
measurement site.
CO2
CO2 Apnea
H
AG Apnea
H
FiO2 Too Low
H
AG
The patient stops breathing, or the respiration signal was too weak
for the monitor to perform respiration analysis. Check the patient’s
condition and the RM connections.
Check the patient’s condition, the ventilated O2 content and the AG
connections.
D.2 Technical Alarm Messages
Measurement
XX
D-2
Alarm message
L
I
XX SelfTest Err
H
C
XX Init Err
H
A
XX Init Err N
H
A
Cause and solution
An error occurred to the XX module, or there is a problem
with the communications between the module and the
monitor. Re-plug the module and restart the monitor, or
N is within 1 to 8
XX Comm Err
H
A
XX Comm Stop
H
C
XX Limit Err
L
C
plug the module into another monitor.
XX parameter limit is accidentally changed. Contact your
service personnel.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Measurement
Alarm message
L
I
XX Overrange
L
C
ECG Lead Off
L*
B
ECG YY Lead Off
L*
B
Cause and solution
The measured XX value is not within the specified range
for XX measurement. Contact your service personnel.
The electrode has become detached from the patient or
Note: YY represents the leadwires, V (V1,
the lead wire has become disconnected from the adapter
V2, V3, V4, V5, V6,), LL, LA, RA, as per AHA
cable. Check the connections of the electrodes and
standard, or C (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6), F, L
leadwires.
and R as per IEC standard.
The ECG signal is noisy. Check for any possible sources of
ECG Noisy
L
A
signal noise around the cable and electrode, and check
the patient for great motion.
Artifacts are detected on the ECG analysis lead and as a
result heart rate cannot be calculated and Asystole, Vfib
and Vtac cannot be analyzed. Check the connections of
ECG Artifact
L
A
the electrodes and leadwires and check for any possible
source of interference around the cable and electrode.
ECG
Check the patient’s condition and check the patient for
great motion.
High frequency signals are detected on the ECG analysis
ECG High Freq. Noise
L
A
lead. Check for any possible source of interference
around the cable and electrode.
Low frequency signals are detected on the ECG analysis
ECG Low Freq. Noise
L
A
lead. Check for any possible source of interference
around the cable and electrode.
The ECG amplitude didn’t reach the detected threshold.
ECG Amplitude Too Small
L
C
Check for any possible source of interference around the
cable and electrode.
ECG configuration is wrongly downloaded. Check the
ECG Config. Err
L
C
downloaded configuration and re-download the correct
configuration.
Resp
Temp
SpO2
Resp Disturbed
L
A
The respiration circuit is disturbed. Restart the monitor.
Temp Cal. Err
H
C
A calibration failed. Restart the monitor.
T1 Sensor Off
L
A
The Temp sensor has become detached from the patient
T2 Sensor Off
L
A
or the module. Check the sensor connections.
SpO2 Sensor Off
L*
B
The SpO2 sensor has become detached from the patient
SpO2 Sensor Fault
L
C
or the module, or there is a fault with the SpO2 sensor, or
SpO2 No Sensor
L
B
SpO2 Unknown Sensor
L
C
SpO2 Sensor Incompatible
L
C
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
an unspecified SpO2 sensor has been used. Check the
sensor application site and the sensor type, and make
sure if the sensor is damaged. Reconnect the sensor or
use a new sensor.
D-3
Measurement
Alarm message
L
I
Cause and solution
There is too much light on the SpO2 sensor. Move the
SpO2 Too Much Light
L
C
sensor to a place with lower level of ambient light or
cover the sensor to minimize the ambient light.
SpO2 Low Signal
L
C
The SpO2 signal is too low or too weak. Check the
SpO2 Weak Signal
L
C
patient’s condition and change the sensor application
SpO2 Weak Pulse
L
C
site. If the error persists, replace the sensor.
The SpO2 signal has been interfered. Check for any
SpO2 Interference
L
C
possible sources of signal noise around the sensor and
check the patient for great motion.
There is a problem with the SpO2 measurement board.
SpO2 Board Fault
L
C
Do not use the module and contact your service
personnel.
NIBP Loose Cuff
L
A
The NIBP cuff is not properly connected, or there is a leak
NIBP Air Leak
L
A
in the airway.
NIBP Pneumatic Leak
L
A
Check the NIBP cuff and pump for leakages.
NIBP Cuff Type Wrong
L
A
The cuff type applied mismatches the patient category.
Verify the patient category and replace the cuff.
An error occurred to the air pressure. Verify that the
NIBP Air Pressure Err
L
A
monitor application site meets the environmental
requirements and check if there is any source that affects
the air pressure.
The patient’s pulse is weak or the cuff is loose. Check the
NIBP Weak Signal
L
A
patient’s condition and change the cuff application site. If
the error persists, replace the cuff.
NIBP
The NIBP signal is saturated due to excess motion or
NIBP Signal Saturated
L
A
NIBP Overrange
L
A
NIBP Excessive Motion
L
A
NIBP Cuff Overpress.
L
A
NIBP Equip Err
H
A
An error occurred during NIBP measurement and
NIBP Timeout
L
A
therefore the monitor cannot perform analysis correctly.
NIBP Measure Failed
L
A
NIBP Illegally Reset
L
A
other sources.
The measured NIBP value is not within the specified
range.
Check the patient’s condition and reduce the patient
motion.
The NIBP airway may be occluded. Check the airway and
measure again.
Check the patient’s condition and NIBP connections, or
IBP
D-4
YY Sensor Off
YY Non-Pulsatile
replace the cuff.
An illegal reset occurred during NIBP measurement.
Check if the airway is occluded.
Check the sensor connection and reconnect the sensor.
L
A
The catheter may be occluded. Please flush the catheter.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Measurement
Alarm message
L
I
Cause and solution
TB Sensor Off
L
A
Check the sensor connection and reconnect the sensor.
CO2 Sensor High Temp
L
C
Check, stop using or replace the sensor.
CO2 Sensor Low Temp
L
C
Check, stop using or replace the sensor.
YY represents an IBP label.
C.O.
The operating temperature of the CO2 module goes
CO2 Temp Overrange
L
C
beyond the specified range. After it restores within the
specified range, the module will restart automatically.
CO2 Airway High Press.
L
C
CO2 Airway Low Press.
L
C
CO2 High Barometric Press.
L
C
An error occurred in the airway pressure. Check the
patient connection and patient circuit, and then restart
the monitor.
Check the CO2 connections, make sure that the monitor
application site meets the requirements, and check for
CO2 Low Barometric Press.
L
C
special sources that affect the ambient pressure. Restart
the monitor.
CO2
CO2 FilterLine Occluded
L
C
CO2 No Watertrap
L
B
CO2 Check Adapter
L
A
CO2 FilterLine Err
L
C
The airway or watertrap was occluded. Check the airway
and remove the occlusion.
Check the watertrap connections.
There is a problem with the airway adapter. Check, clean
or replace the adapter.
Check if there is a leak in the CO2 sample line or the CO2
sample line has been occluded.
Check the CO2 connections. After the sensor’s
CO2 Zero Failed
L
A
temperature becomes stabilized, perform a zero
calibration again.
AG
CO2 System Err
L
A
Re-plug the module or restart the monitor.
CO2 Check Cal.
L
C
Perform a calibration.
CO2 Check Airway
L
C
An error occurred to the airway.
CO2 No Filterline
L
A
Make sure that the filterline is connected.
CO2 No Sensor
L
A
Make sure that the sensor is connected.
CO2 Main Board Err
H
C
CO2 Checking Sensor
L
C
CO2 Replace Scrubber&Pump
L
C
CO2 15V Overrange
H
C
CO2 Hardware Err
H
C
AG No Watertrap
L
B
AG Change Watertrap
L
A
Wait until the change is completed.
AG Watertrap Type Wrong
L
A
Make sure that a correct watertrap has been used.
O2 Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
The measured value has exceeded the specified accuracy
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
There is a problem with the CO2 module. Re-plug the
module or restart the monitor.
Check the connections of the watertrap and re-connect
it.
D-5
Measurement
Alarm message
L
I
Cause and solution
N2O Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
range.
CO2 Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
Enf Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
Iso Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
Sev Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
Hal Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
Des Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
awRR Accuracy Unspecified
L
A
AG Hardware Err
H
A
AG Airway Occluded
L
A
AG Zero Failed
L
A
12V Too High
H
C
12V Too Low
H
C
5V Too High
H
C
There is a problem with the system power supply. Restart
5V Too Low
H
C
the monitor.
3.3V Too High
H
C
3.3V Too Low
H
C
Battery Too Low
H
C
Power
Remove the AG module. Stop using the module and
contact your service personnel.
Check the airway and remove the occlusion.
Re-plug the module or restart the monitor, and then
perform a zero calibration again.
Connect the monitor to an AC power source and allow
the batteries to charge.
The two batteries have different charge capacity, or the
batteries unspecified have been used, or there is a
Different Battery Voltages
M
C
problem with the batteries. Make sure that correct
batteries are used and the batteries are not damaged, or
replace the batteries.
H
C
RT Clock Not Exist
H
C
Recorder Init Err N
L
A
Recorder SelfTest Err
L
A
Recorder Comm Err
L
A
Recorder S. Comm Err
L
A
Recorder Unavailable
L
A
Recorder Vlt High
L
C
An error occurred to the system power supply. Restart
Recorder Vlt Low
L
C
the monitor.
N is within 1 to 8.
Recorder
D-6
The power consumption of the equipment is too high.
Battery Power Overload
Power the monitor using an AC power source.
Contact your service personnel.
Restart the monitor.
Stop the recording and restart the monitor.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
Measurement
Alarm message
L
I
Cause and solution
The recorder has been working for too long time. Stop
Recorder Head Hot
L
C
the recording and resume the recording till the recorder’s
printhead cools down.
System
Rec Paper Wrong Pos.
L
A
System Watchdog Err
H
C
System Software Err
H
C
System CMOS Full
H
C
System CMOS Err
H
C
System FPGA Err
H
C
System Err N
H
C
Re-load the recorder paper.
An error occurred to the system. Restart the monitor.
N is within 2 to 12.
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
D-7
FOR YOUR NOTES
D-8
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
E Symbols and Abbreviations
E.1 Symbols
µA
microampere
µV
microvolt
µs
Microsecond
A
ampere
Ah
ampere hour
bpm
beat per minute
bps
bit per second
ºC
centigrade
cc
cubic centimeter
cm
centimeter
dB
decibel
DS
dyne second
ºF
fahrenheit
g
gram
GHz
gigahertz
GTT
gutta
h
hour
Hz
hertz
in
inch
kg
kilogram
kPa
kilopascal
L
litre
lb
pound
m
meter
mAh
milliampere hour
Mb
mega byte
mcg
microgram
mEq
milli-equivalents
mg
milligram
min
minute
ml
milliliter
mm
millimeter
mmHg
millimeters of mercury
cmH2O
centimeters of water
ms
millisecond
mV
millivolt
mW
milliwatt
MΩ
megaohm
nm
nanometer
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
E-1
rpm
breath per minute
s
second
V
volt
VA
volt ampere
Ω
ohm
W
watt
–
minus, negative
%
percent
/
per; divide; or
+
plus
=
equal to
<
less than
>
greater than
≤
less than or equal to
≥
greater than or equal to
±
plus or minus
×
multiply
E.2 Abbreviations
E-2
AaDO2
alveolar-arterial oxygen gradient
AAMI
Association for Advancement of Medical Instrumentation
AC
alternating current
ACI
acceleration index
Adu
adult
AG
anaesthesia gas
AHA
American Heart Association
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
Ao
aortic pressure
Art
arterial
aVF
left foot augmented lead
aVL
left arm augmented lead
aVR
right arm augmented lead
awRR
airway respiratory rate
BAP
brachial arterial pressure
BIS
bispectral index
BP
blood pressure
BPSK
binary phase shift keying
BSA
body surface area
BT
blood temperature
BTPS
body temperature and pressure, saturated
C.I.
cardiac index
CCI
Continuous Cardiac Index
C.O.
cardiac output
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
CCO
Continuous Cardiac Output
CaO2
arterial oxygen content
CCU
cardiac (coronary) care unit
CFI
cardiac function index
CIS
Clinical Information System
CISPR
International Special Committee on Radio Interference
CMOS
complementary metal oxide semiconductor
CMS
central monitoring system
CO2
carbon dioxide
COHb
carboxyhemoglobin
CP
cardiopulmonary
CPI
cardiac power index
CPO
Cardiac Power Output
CVP
central venous pressure
DC
direct current
Des
desflurane
Dia
diastolic
DPI
dot per inch
dPmx
left ventricular contractility
DVI
digital video interface
DO2
oxygen delivery
DO2I
oxygen delivery index
ECG
electrocardiograph
EDV
end-diastolic volume
EEC
European Economic Community
EEG
electroencephalogram
EMC
electromagnetic compatibility
EMG
electromyography
EMI
electromagnetic interference
Enf
enflurane
ESU
electrosurgical unit
Et
end-tidal
EtCO2
end-tidal carbon dioxide
EtN2O
end-tidal nitrous oxide
EtO
ethylene oxide
EtO2
end-tidal oxygen
EVLW
extravascular lung water
ELWI
extravascular lung water index
FAP
femoral arterial pressure
FCC
Federal Communication Commission
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
FEV1.0%
first second forced expiratory volume ratio
Fi
fraction of inspired
FiCO2
fraction of inspired carbon dioxide
FiN2O
fraction of inspired nitrous oxide
FiO2
fraction of inspired oxygen
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
E-3
E-4
FPGA
field programmable gate array
FV
flow-volume
GEDV
global end diastolic volume
GEDI
global end diastolic volume index
GEF
global ejection fraction
Hal
halothane
Hct
haematocrit
Hb
hemoglobin
Hb-CO
carbon mono-oxide hemoglobin
HbO2
oxyhemoglobin
HIS
hospital information system
HR
heart rate
I:E
inspiratory-expiratory ratio
IBP
invasive brood pressure
ICG
impedance cardiography
ICP
intracranial pressure
ICT/B
intracranial catheter tip pressure transducer
ICU
intensive care unit
ID
identification
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Ins
inspired minimum
IP
internet protocol
Iso
isoflurane
IT
injectate temperature
ITBI
Intrathoracic Blood Volume Index
ITBV
Intrathoracic Blood Volume
LA
left arm
LAP
left atrial pressure
Lat
lateral
LCD
liquid crystal display
LCW
left cardiac work
LCWI
left cardiac work index
LED
light emitting diode
LL
left leg
LVD
low voltage directive
LVDS
low voltage differential signal
LVET
left ventricular ejection time
LVSW
left ventricular stroke work
LVSWI
left ventricular stroke work index
MAC
minimum alveolar concentration
Art mean
mean arterial pressure
MDD
Medical Device Directive
MetHb
methemoglobin
MRI
magnetic resonance imaging
MRN
medical record number
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
MVe
expiratory minute volume
MVi
inspiratory minute volume
N/A
not applied
N2
nitrogen
N2O
nitrous oxide
Neo
neonate
NIBP
noninvasive blood pressure
O2
oxygen
O2CI
oxygen consumption index
O2R
oxygen extraction ratio
OR
operating room
OxyCRG
oxygen cardio-respirogram
PA
pulmonary artery
pArt-D
diastolic artery pressure
pArt-M
mean artery pressure
pArt-S
systolic artery pressure
Paw
airway pressure
PAWP
pulmonary artery wedge pressure
PD
photodetector
Ped
pediatric
PEEP
positive end expiratory pressure
PEF
peak expiratory flow
PEP
pre-ejection period
PIF
peak inspiratory flow
PIP
peak inspiratory pressure
Pleth
plethysmogram
Pmean
mean pressure
Pplat
plateau pressure
PPV
Pulse Pressure Variation
PR
pulse rate
PVC
premature ventricular contraction
PVR
pulmonary vascular resistance
PVRI
pulmonary vascular resistance index
PVPI
pulmonary vascular permeability index
PPV
pulse pressure variation
pArt
artery pressure
pCVP
central venous pressure
R
right
RA
right arm
RAM
random access memory
RAP
right atrial pressure
Rec
record, recording
Resp
respiration
RHb
reduced hemoglobin
RL
right leg
RM
respiratory mechanics
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
E-5
E-6
RR
respiration rate
RSBI
rapid shallow breathing index
SaO2
arterial oxygen saturation
SEF
spectral edge frequency
Sev
sevoflurane
SFM
self-maintenance
SI
stroke index
SMR
satellite module rack
SpO2
arterial oxygen saturation from pulse oximetry
SQI
signal quality index
SR
suppression ratio
STR
systolic time ratio
SV
stroke volume
SVI
Stroke Volume Index
SVR
systemic vascular resistance
SVRI
systemic vascular resistance index
SVV
stroke volume variation
SvO2
mixed venous oxygen saturation
ScvO2
central venous oxygen saturation
Sync
synchronization
Sys
systolic pressure
Taxil
axillary temperature
TB
Blood Temperature
TD
temperature difference
Temp
temperature
TFC
thoracic fluid content
TFI
thoracic fluid index
TFT
thin-film technology
Toral
oral temperature
TP
total power
Trect
rectal temperature
TVe
expiratory tidal volume
TVi
inspiratory tidal volume
UAP
umbilical arterial pressure
UPS
uninterruptible power supply
USB
universal serial bus
UVP
umbilical venous pressure
VAC
volts alternating current
VEPT
volume of electrically participating tissue
VI
velocity index
VO2
oxygen consumption
VO2I
oxygen consumption index
WLAN
wireless local area network
Passport 12/Passport 8 Operator’s Manual
P/N: 046-004417-00 (1.0)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement